# CommandSection

title: TLDR
content:
<b>Create a CHD from a BIN/CUE pair (CD-ROM image)</b>`chdman createcd [[-i|--input]] [path/to/file.cue] [[-o|--output]] [path/to/file.chd]`<br><b>Create a CHD from a raw hard drive image</b>`chdman createhd [[-i|--input]] [path/to/disk.img] [[-o|--output]] [path/to/disk.chd]`<br><b>Extract (decompress) a CHD back to BIN/CUE</b>`chdman extractcd [[-i|--input]] [path/to/file.chd] [[-o|--output]] [path/to/file.cue]`<br><b>Verify integrity of CHD file</b>`chdman verify [[-i|--input]] [path/to/file.chd]`<br><b>View CHD metadata information</b>`chdman info [[-i|--input]] [path/to/file.chd]`<br><b>Update a CHD file to the latest format version</b>`chdman copy [[-i|--input]] [path/to/old_file.chd] [[-o|--output]] [path/to/new_file.chd]`<br><b>Convert a compressed hard drive image to uncompressed (for editing)</b>`chdman extracthd [[-i|--input]] [path/to/disk.chd] [[-o|--output]] [path/to/disk.img]`


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>dzdo</b> [<i>-bEHPS</i>] [<i>-p prompt</i>] [<i>-u user|#uid</i>] [<i>-i | -s</i>] [<i>VAR=value...</i>] <i>command</i> [<i>arguments...</i>]<br><b>dzdo</b> [<i>-k | -l | -v</i>]


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-u</b> <i>user</i> | <i>#uid</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Execute the <i>command</i> as the specified <i>user</i> or numeric UID instead of the default target user (typically root).<br><br><b><b>-i</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Run a login shell as the target user. This initializes the environment as if the user had logged in directly, including setting HOME, SHELL, USER, LOGNAME, and PATH.<br><br><b><b>-s</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Run a non-login shell as the target user. This typically uses the target user's default shell and may not fully reinitialize the environment like <b>-i</b>.<br><br><b><b>-l</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;List the commands the invoking user is permitted to run via <code>dzdo</code>, based on Delinea policies configured in Active Directory.<br><br><b><b>-k</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Invalidate the user's cached credentials (e.g., password timestamp), forcing re-authentication for the next <code>dzdo</code> command.<br><br><b><b>-v</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display the <code>dzdo</code> version and exit.<br><br><b><b>-H</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Set the HOME environment variable to the home directory of the target user.<br><br><b><b>-P</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Preserve the invoking user's primary group and any supplementary groups when executing the command.<br><br><b><b>-E</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Preserve the entire environment of the invoking user when running the command, typically overriding cleanup of environment variables.<br><br><b><b>-b</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Execute the command in the background, detaching it from the controlling terminal.<br><br><b><b>-S</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Read the password from standard input (stdin) instead of from the terminal. This is useful for scripting but should be used with caution.<br><br><b><b>-p</b> <i>prompt</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Use a custom password <i>prompt</i> instead of the default 'Password:'.<br><br><b><i>VAR=value</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Set environment variables for the command. These are typically added to the environment after Delinea's policy-defined variables but before the command executes.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<code>dzdo</code> is Delinea's (formerly Centrify) functional equivalent of the standard <code>sudo</code> command, designed for environments integrating Unix/Linux systems with Microsoft Active Directory. Its primary purpose is to allow authorized users to execute commands as another user, typically <code>root</code>, based on centralized access policies defined within Active Directory. Unlike <code>sudo</code>, which relies on local <code>/etc/sudoers</code> files, <code>dzdo</code> queries the Delinea agent (<code>adclient</code>) to evaluate policies stored in Active Directory. This provides enterprises with centralized management, consistent privilege delegation across a diverse server estate, robust auditing capabilities, and seamless integration with existing AD authentication mechanisms. It enhances security and compliance by ensuring that privileged access is controlled and logged centrally, rather than scattered across individual servers. <code>dzdo</code> aims for compatibility with <code>sudo</code>'s syntax and behavior, minimizing the learning curve for administrators.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<ul><li><code>dzdo</code> requires the Delinea (formerly Centrify) agent (<code>adclient</code>) to be installed, running, and properly configured on the host system to function.</li><li>All access policies are centrally managed within Active Directory through Delinea's tools (e.g., Access Manager), not via local <code>sudoers</code> files. This means local <code>sudoers</code> configurations are ignored by <code>dzdo</code>.</li><li>Its functionality is dependent on a healthy connection to Active Directory and the Delinea infrastructure for policy evaluation and authentication.</li><li><code>dzdo</code> is part of a commercial product suite, requiring appropriate licensing from Delinea.</li></ul>


title: <B>CENTRALIZED POLICY MANAGEMENT</B>
content:
Unlike traditional <code>sudo</code>, <code>dzdo</code> leverages policies defined in Active Directory Group Policy Objects (GPOs) or through Delinea's Access Manager. This provides granular control over who can run what commands, when, from where, and on which systems, all managed from a single console, simplifying administration for large environments.


title: <B>COMPREHENSIVE AUDITING</B>
content:
Every <code>dzdo</code> command execution is meticulously logged and audited by the Delinea agent. These audit trails capture critical details such as the invoking user, the command executed, timestamp, and success/failure. This data is invaluable for security monitoring, forensics, and compliance reporting, often integrated with Security Information and Event Management (SIEM) systems.


title: <B>SEAMLESS ACTIVE DIRECTORY INTEGRATION</B>
content:
<code>dzdo</code> fully integrates with Active Directory for user authentication and authorization. It utilizes existing AD user accounts and groups, eliminating the need for separate local accounts and passwords for privileged users on Unix/Linux systems, thus streamlining identity management and reducing credential sprawl.


title: HISTORY
content:
<code>dzdo</code> was developed by Centrify Corporation (now Delinea) as a core component of its Server Suite, a product designed to extend Active Directory's authentication and authorization capabilities to Unix, Linux, and macOS systems. Introduced to provide <code>sudo</code>-like functionality, its primary innovation was to shift the management of privileged access policies from local configuration files to a centralized Active Directory infrastructure. This development aimed to meet enterprise demands for unified identity management, streamlined compliance, and enhanced security across heterogeneous IT environments, reducing the complexity of managing <code>sudoers</code> files on hundreds or thousands of servers.


title: TLDR
content:
<b>Run a command with elevated privileges</b>`dzdo [command]`<br><b>Run a command as another user</b>`dzdo -u [user] [command]`<br><b>Edit a file with elevated privileges using the default editor</b>`dzdo -e [path/to/file]`<br><b>Launch an interactive login shell with elevated privileges</b>`dzdo -i`<br><b>Launch the default shell with elevated privileges</b>`dzdo -s`<br><b>List allowed commands for the current user</b>`dzdo -l`<br><b>Validate and update authentication timestamp</b>`dzdo -v`<br><b>Display version</b>`dzdo -V`


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>gradle</b> [<i>GLOBAL_OPTIONS</i>] <b>build</b> [<i>TASK_OPTIONS</i>]<br><i>GLOBAL_OPTIONS</i>: Options that apply to the entire Gradle invocation.<br><i>TASK_OPTIONS</i>: Options specific to the <b>build</b> task or tasks it depends on, often passed as system properties or project properties (e.g., -PmyProp=value).


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>--build-file</b> <i><FILE></i>, <b>-b</b> <i><FILE></i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the build file. Defaults to <i>build.gradle</i> or <i>build.gradle.kts</i> in the current directory.<br><br><b><b>--project-dir</b> <i><DIR></i>, <b>-p</b> <i><DIR></i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the start directory for Gradle to search for the build script.<br><br><b><b>--console</b> <i><MODE></i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the console output mode. Modes include <i>plain</i>, <i>auto</i>, <i>rich</i>.<br><br><b><b>--debug</b>, <b>-d</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Log in debug mode (includes normal, info, lifecycle, and debug messages).<br><br><b><b>--info</b>, <b>-i</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Log in info mode (includes normal, info, and lifecycle messages).<br><br><b><b>--stacktrace</b>, <b>-s</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Print out the stacktrace for all exceptions.<br><br><b><b>--full-stacktrace</b>, <b>-S</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Print out the full stacktrace for all exceptions.<br><br><b><b>--rerun-tasks</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Forces all tasks to be re-executed, ignoring up-to-date checks.<br><br><b><b>--refresh-dependencies</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Refreshes external dependencies (causes all dependencies to be resolved again).<br><br><b><b>--no-daemon</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Do not use the Gradle daemon to run the build. The daemon typically speeds up subsequent builds.<br><br><b><b>--parallel</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Build projects in parallel. Can significantly speed up multi-project builds.<br><br><b><b>-x</b> <i><TASK></i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Exclude tasks from the build. For example, <b>gradle build -x test</b> would run the build without executing the <i>test</i> task.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The "gradle-build" command, typically invoked as <b>gradle build</b>, is a fundamental command in the Gradle build automation tool used to compile, test, and package a software project. It initiates the execution of the 'build' lifecycle task, which itself depends on other standard tasks such as <b>assemble</b> (for compiling and packaging), <b>check</b> (for running tests and static analysis), and potentially others defined in the project's <i>build.gradle</i> or <i>build.gradle.kts</i> file.<br><br>This command is central to the development workflow, allowing developers to ensure their code compiles, passes all defined tests, and produces distributable artifacts like JARs, WARs, or other packages. Gradle's declarative DSL (Domain Specific Language), often written in Groovy or Kotlin, allows for highly customizable and flexible build processes. When <b>gradle build</b> is executed, Gradle resolves dependencies, compiles source code, runs unit and integration tests, and bundles the output, providing comprehensive feedback on the build's success or failure.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<ul><li><b>Gradle Installation</b>: The <b>gradle</b> executable must be installed on your system and available in the system's PATH. Alternatively, you can use the Gradle Wrapper (<i>gradlew</i> or <i>gradlew.bat</i>) which bundles the necessary Gradle version.</li><li><b>Build Script Presence</b>: A <i>build.gradle</i> or <i>build.gradle.kts</i> file must exist in the current directory or a parent directory for Gradle to identify the project.</li><li><b>JDK Requirement</b>: Gradle projects typically require a Java Development Kit (JDK) to be installed and configured correctly (via <i>JAVA_HOME</i> environment variable) for compilation and execution.</li><li><b>Dependency Management</b>: External dependencies declared in the build script must be resolvable from configured repositories (e.g., Maven Central). Network connectivity is often required for the initial download of these dependencies.</li></ul>


title: THE BUILD LIFECYCLE
content:
The <b>build</b> task is a composite task that represents a complete build lifecycle. It depends on <b>check</b> (which runs tests) and <b>assemble</b> (which compiles and packages artifacts). Understanding these dependencies helps in customizing the build process, for example, by excluding certain sub-tasks or injecting custom logic at different phases.


title: OUTPUT AND REPORTING
content:
Upon successful execution, <b>gradle build</b> typically outputs messages indicating the completion of various tasks and ultimately a `BUILD SUCCESSFUL` message. If tests are run, it might also generate HTML reports in the project's <i>build/reports/tests</i> directory. In case of failure, detailed error messages and stacktraces (especially with <b>--stacktrace</b>) are provided to help diagnose issues.


title: CUSTOMIZING THE BUILD TASK
content:
The behavior of the <b>build</b> task, and the tasks it depends on, can be extensively customized within the <i>build.gradle</i> or <i>build.gradle.kts</i> file. This includes configuring compiler options, test execution parameters, artifact naming conventions, and adding custom tasks or dependencies between existing ones.


title: HISTORY
content:
Gradle emerged in 2007, aiming to combine the best features of Apache Ant and Apache Maven. It introduced a Groovy-based Domain Specific Language (DSL) for build scripts, offering greater flexibility and expressiveness compared to XML-based configurations. Key milestones include the introduction of the Gradle Daemon for faster incremental builds, robust dependency management, and strong support for multi-project builds. In more recent years, Gradle added official support for a Kotlin DSL, providing a more type-safe and IDE-friendly experience for defining builds. Its focus on performance, incremental builds, and a highly configurable task graph has made it a popular choice for building a wide range of JVM-based applications, mobile apps (Android), and native projects.


title: SEE ALSO
content:
<b>gradle init</b>, <b>gradle clean</b>, <b>gradle test</b>, <b>gradle assemble</b>, <b>gradle tasks</b>, <b>mvn</b> (Maven build tool), <b>ant</b> (Apache Ant build tool)


title: TLDR
content:
<b>Build the project</b>`gradle build`<br><b>Perform a clean build</b>`gradle clean build`<br><b>Build the project while skipping tests</b>`gradle build [[-x|--exclude-task]] test`<br><b>Build with more detailed logging</b>`gradle build [[-i|--info]]`


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>--help</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays a help message for the `jj next` command, detailing its usage and available options.<br><br><b><b>-h</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;A shorthand alias for the <b>--help</b> option, providing a quick summary of the command's usage.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The `jj next` command is an integral part of the <I>Jujutsu (jj)</I> version control system, designed for intuitive navigation through the commit graph. It allows users to advance the working copy to the "next" unapplied change in the current commit's lineage. This is especially useful in workflows where developers maintain a stack of dependent changes, akin to patch stacks or interactive rebases in other VCS. <br><br>Unlike traditional systems that might require explicit branch checkouts or complex rebase commands, `jj next` simplifies moving forward through a series of development steps. It inherently understands the relationship between commits and the working copy, treating the working copy itself as a mutable commit. This command, paired with `jj prev`, provides a powerful and streamlined way to traverse and interact with the commit history, enabling rapid iteration and review of sequential changes without losing context. It's a cornerstone of Jujutsu's user-friendly approach to managing complex histories.


title: CAVEATS
content:
Requires the <I>Jujutsu (jj)</I> version control system to be installed and configured. <br>The command operates relative to the current working copy's parent change. If there are multiple child changes (e.g., diverging branches from the current commit), the specific "next" change chosen by `jj next` is determined by Jujutsu's internal logic, which is typically deterministic but might not always align with the user's immediate expectation without a clear understanding of the commit graph. <br>If the current working copy is already at a "head" (a commit with no further children that are not already part of the working copy), `jj next` will indicate there is no next change or simply do nothing.


title: WORKING COPY AS A MUTABLE COMMIT
content:
In <I>Jujutsu</I>, the working copy is not just a collection of files but is treated as a distinct, mutable commit. The `jj next` command effectively moves this working copy commit to a child commit in the graph, making that child commit the new parent of the working copy. This abstraction simplifies many operations that are complex in other VCS and is a core differentiator of Jujutsu.


title: STACKING CHANGES WORKFLOW
content:
`jj next` is crucial for workflows involving 'stacked changes' or 'patch stacks'. Developers can build a series of dependent commits, and `jj next` allows them to easily move forward through this stack, applying each subsequent change to the working copy. This facilitates iterative development, code review, and refactoring by keeping related changes isolated but easily navigable, enhancing productivity and code quality.


title: HISTORY
content:
The <I>Jujutsu (jj)</I> VCS, which includes the `jj next` command, emerged around 2020 as a modern alternative to traditional systems like Git. Developed by Martin von Zweigbergk, its design philosophy centers on a simpler, more powerful model for version control, particularly for managing complex histories and stacked changes. The `jj next` and `jj prev` commands are fundamental to Jujutsu's unique interactive workflow, treating the working copy as a mutable commit and enabling seamless navigation through sequential changes. This contrasts sharply with Git's model, where similar operations often require more explicit branch management or interactive rebase commands. These commands are key contributors to Jujutsu's goal of making advanced VCS operations more intuitive and less error-prone.


title: TLDR
content:
<b>Move the working-copy commit to the next child revision</b>`jj next`<br><b>Move the working-copy commit a number of revisions forward</b>`jj next [offset]`<br><b>Edit the child revision directly, instead of creating a new working-copy commit</b>`jj next [[-e|--edit]]`<br><b>Create a new working-copy commit instead of editing the child revision directly</b>`jj next [[-n|--no-edit]]`<br><b>Jump to the next conflicted child</b>`jj next --conflict`


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>-r <REVISION>, --revision <REVISION></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The revision to operate on. If not specified, the working copy commit is used. The command will then try to move the working copy to the parent of this revision.<br><br><b>--at <REVISION></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Where to put the working copy. This option only makes sense if <i>--revision</i> is also specified. By default, the working copy is moved to the parent of the <i>--revision</i> target.<br><br><b>--ignore-working-copy</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;If specified, the command will not change the working copy commit. Instead, it will simply print the ID of the calculated 'previous' commit. This is useful for scripting or inspecting without modifying your workspace.<br><br><b>-n <COUNT>, --count <COUNT></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;How many parents to go back. For instance, <b>-n 2</b> would move to the grandparent commit. Defaults to 1.<br><br><b>-m <NUMBER>, --parent <NUMBER></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Which parent to select when a commit has multiple parents (e.g., a merge commit). Parent 0 is usually the 'main' parent, parent 1 is the 'secondary' parent, and so on. Defaults to 0.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <b>jj-prev</b> command in Jujutsu (jj) is a fundamental navigation utility that allows users to move the current working copy commit, or a specified revision, to its parent commit. This facilitates stepping backwards through the repository's history, enabling quick review of previous states, debugging by isolating changes, or preparing to create new branches from an earlier point.<br><br>By default, it operates on the commit currently associated with your working copy, effectively updating your local workspace to reflect the chosen parent commit. Jujutsu handles uncommitted changes by rebasing them onto the new parent, ensuring a smooth transition without losing work. For commits with multiple parents (e.g., merge commits), <b>jj-prev</b> provides options to specify which parent to move to.


title: CAVEATS
content:
When dealing with merge commits, the concept of a 'single previous' commit becomes ambiguous. By default, <b>jj-prev</b> selects the first parent (parent 0). To navigate to other parents of a merge commit, you must explicitly use the <i>--parent</i> option. Users should be aware that moving the working copy commit changes the current state of their repository, though Jujutsu's mutable history model and automatic rebase of uncommitted changes typically makes this a non-destructive operation.


title: DEFAULT BEHAVIOR
content:
By default, <b>jj-prev</b> operates on the current working copy commit and moves it to its immediate first parent. Any uncommitted changes in the working copy are automatically rebased onto the new parent commit, preserving your work.


title: NAVIGATION PHILOSOPHY
content:
Jujutsu's navigation commands like <b>jj-prev</b>, <b>jj-next</b>, and <b>jj-goto</b> are designed to provide a more fluid way to explore and manipulate history compared to traditional VCS tools. They encourage interactive rebasing and reordering of changes, aligning with Jujutsu's mutable history paradigm.


title: HISTORY
content:
Jujutsu (jj) is a modern, experimental version control system developed by Martin Karlsson, which began gaining traction around 2022-2023. It aims to offer a fresh perspective on VCS, combining features from Git, Mercurial, and Pijul, with a strong focus on a mutable history model and an improved user experience. The <b>jj-prev</b> command is a core component of its intuitive navigation capabilities, designed to simplify moving through the commit graph compared to traditional VCS workflows.


title: TLDR
content:
<b>Move the working-copy commit to the previous parent revision</b>`jj prev`<br><b>Move the working-copy commit a number of revisions backward</b>`jj prev [offset]`<br><b>Edit the parent revision directly, instead of creating a new working-copy commit</b>`jj prev [[-e|--edit]]`<br><b>Create a new working-copy commit instead of editing the parent revision directly</b>`jj prev [[-n|--no-edit]]`<br><b>Jump to the previous conflicted parent</b>`jj prev --conflict`


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>--at <REVISION></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Undo operations up to and including the operation that introduced the specified <I>REVISION</I>. This allows for more precise control over which operations are reverted, rather than just the very last one. The <I>REVISION</I> can be an operation ID or a commit ID associated with an operation.<br><br><b>--dry-run</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Show what operations would be undone and what the resulting repository state would be, without actually performing the undo operation. This is useful for previewing the impact of <I>jj-undo</I> before committing to it.<br><br><b>-h, --help</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display a help message and exit.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<b>jj-undo</b> is a powerful command within the Jujutsu (<I>jj</I>) version control system that allows users to easily reverse the effects of their previous <I>jj</I> operations. Unlike traditional VCS systems that might focus on reverting file changes, <I>jj-undo</I> operates on the repository's <I>operation log</I>.<br><br>Every command that modifies the repository's state—such as <I>jj commit</I>, <I>jj rebase</I>, <I>jj branch create</I>, or even <I>jj restore</I>—records an entry in this log. <I>jj-undo</I> effectively steps back one or more entries in this log, restoring the repository to the state it was in before the undone operations. This provides a robust safety net, making it simple to recover from accidental or incorrect commands without complex manual intervention. It's especially useful for exploratory workflows where frequent command usage might lead to unexpected or undesirable repository states, allowing developers to experiment confidently.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<b>jj-undo</b> only reverses <I>jj</I> operations; it does not revert external file changes or modifications made outside of the <I>jj</I> command line.<br><br>While powerful, using <I>jj-undo</I> with the <I>--at</I> option requires a good understanding of the operation log to ensure the correct operations are targeted. Care should also be exercised when undoing operations that have already been shared or pushed, as this can create divergent history for collaborators if not handled carefully with subsequent operations like <I>jj move</I> or <I>jj squash</I>.


title: THE OPERATION LOG
content:
<b>jj-undo</b> fundamentally relies on Jujutsu's internal <I>operation log</I>. Every single command that modifies the repository's state, from creating new commits to rebasing or amending existing ones, records a unique entry in this log. <I>jj-undo</I> navigates this log backwards, effectively rewinding the repository to a previous state. Users can inspect this chronological record of operations using the <I>jj op log</I> command to understand the history of their repository's transformations.


title: SAFETY NET FOR EXPLORATORY WORKFLOWS
content:
This command is particularly invaluable in exploratory development and rapid prototyping. Developers can experiment freely with various <I>jj</I> commands—testing different rebase strategies, creating speculative branches, or rewriting history—without the fear of irrevocably corrupting their repository state. If an operation doesn't yield the desired result, <I>jj-undo</I> provides an immediate and reliable way to revert to a known good state, thereby fostering more confident experimentation and reducing cognitive load.


title: HISTORY
content:
Jujutsu (<I>jj</I>) emerged as a modern, experimental version control system designed to address some of the complexities and limitations of Git. Developed primarily by Martin von Gagern at Google, <I>jj</I> began its journey around 2020-2021. The <I>jj-undo</I> command is a foundational component of <I>jj</I>'s design philosophy, emphasizing an easily navigable and reversible history. It was integrated from early versions, leveraging the robust operation log as a core mechanism for repository state management. This 'infinite undo' capability aims to make complex VCS operations feel inherently safer and more intuitive, significantly enhancing the developer experience by reducing fear of making irreversible mistakes.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-A, --attributes=</b><I>partnum</I>:<I>bitnum</I>:[0|1]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Set or clear a specific partition attribute bit. Useful for setting flags like 'legacy BIOS bootable' or 'read-only'.<br><br><b><b>-c, --change-name=</b><I>partnum</I>:<I>name</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Change the human-readable name of a specified partition.<br><br><b><b>-d, --delete=</b><I>partnum</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Delete a partition by its number. <b>Warning: This is destructive.</b><br><br><b><b>-g, --new-gpt</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Create a new, empty GPT on the specified device. This will destroy all existing data on the disk.<br><br><b><b>-h, --hybrid=</b><I>partnum</I>:<I>partnum</I>...[:<I>MBR_part_type</I>:<I>disk_id</I>]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Create a hybrid MBR that mirrors up to three specified GPT partitions. Useful for booting legacy OSes from a GPT disk.<br><br><b><b>-n, --new=</b><I>partnum</I>:<I>start</I>:<I>end</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Create a new partition. <I>start</I> and <I>end</I> can be sector numbers, '+' followed by size, or '0' for default values.<br><br><b><b>-o, --mbrtogpt</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Convert an MBR partition table to a GPT, preserving as much data as possible. Creates GUIDs randomly.<br><br><b><b>-p, --print</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Print the current partition table for the specified device. This is a read-only operation.<br><br><b><b>-s, --sort</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sort the partitions by their starting sector number. This can improve disk performance and cleanup partition numbering.<br><br><b><b>-t, --change-type=</b><I>partnum</I>:<I>hexcode</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Change the type code (GUID) of a partition. Use <b>-T</b> to list available type codes.<br><br><b><b>-v, --verify</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Verify the GPT data structures and report any inconsistencies, offering to fix them if possible.<br><br><b><b>-z, --zap-all</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Zap (destroy) all GPT and MBR data structures on the disk. This is highly destructive and should be used with extreme care.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
sgdisk is a powerful command-line utility designed for manipulating GUID Partition Tables (GPTs) on disk devices. Unlike its interactive counterpart, <i>gdisk</i>, <i>sgdisk</i> is primarily intended for non-interactive use, making it ideal for scripting and automated system deployment tasks. It provides comprehensive functionality to create, delete, resize, move, copy, and change attributes of partitions on GPT-formatted disks.<br><br>Key capabilities include converting MBR disks to GPT, creating hybrid MBRs for legacy compatibility, and managing partition type codes and GUIDs. It fully supports the advanced features of GPT, such as handling disks larger than 2TB, accommodating more than four primary partitions, and providing robust data integrity through redundant partition tables and checksums. Users should exercise caution as many operations can be data destructive.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<b><br>Data Loss Risk:</b> Many <i>sgdisk</i> operations, especially those creating or deleting partitions (e.g., <b>-g</b>, <b>-z</b>, <b>-n</b>, <b>-d</b>), are inherently destructive. Always back up critical data before using <i>sgdisk</i>.<br><b>Device Selection:</b> Ensure you specify the correct device (e.g., <i>/dev/sda</i>) and not a partition (e.g., <i>/dev/sda1</i>). Operating on the wrong device can lead to irreversible data loss.<br><b>Root Privileges:</b> <i>sgdisk</i> requires root privileges to operate on disk devices.<br><b>Hybrid MBRs:</b> While supported, hybrid MBRs (created with <b>-h</b>) are generally discouraged. They are a workaround for legacy systems and can complicate disk management.<br><b>Non-Interactive Use:</b> While capable of interactive prompts for some errors, <i>sgdisk</i> is designed for scripting. For interactive partitioning, <i>gdisk</i> is generally preferred.


title: GPT ADVANTAGES
content:
Compared to the older Master Boot Record (MBR) scheme, GPT offers significant advantages:<br><b><br>Disk Size:</b> Supports disks much larger than 2TB, up to 9.4 ZB.<br><b><br>Number of Partitions:</b> By default, allows for up to 128 primary partitions without the need for extended or logical partitions.<br><b><br>Data Integrity:</b> Stores a CRC32 checksum for the GPT header and partition table, and maintains a backup GPT header and partition table at the end of the disk, enabling recovery from corruption.<br><b><br>GUIDs:</b> Uses Globally Unique Identifiers (GUIDs) for both the disk and individual partitions, minimizing name collisions and providing robust identification.


title: HISTORY
content:
<i>sgdisk</i> is part of the <i>gdisk</i> partitioning suite, developed by Roderick W. Smith. It emerged as a crucial tool to address the limitations of traditional MBR partitioning (e.g., 2TB disk size limit, 4 primary partition limit) by fully embracing the GUID Partition Table (GPT) standard. While <i>gdisk</i> provides a user-friendly, interactive interface for GPT manipulation, <i>sgdisk</i> was specifically engineered to facilitate scripting and automation. This non-interactive design allows system administrators and deployment scripts to programmatically manage GPT partitions, making it invaluable for automated system provisioning and disk setup tasks where user interaction is not feasible or desired.


title: TLDR
content:
<b>Display basic GPT partition summary data for a device</b>`sudo sgdisk [[-p|--print]] [/dev/sdX]`<br><b>Wipe both GPT and MBR data structures from a device (destroys all partition information)</b>`sudo sgdisk [[-Z|--zap-all]] [/dev/sdX]`<br><b>Convert a GPT disk to MBR format using up to four partitions</b>`sudo sgdisk [[-m|--gpttombr]] [1:2:3:4] [/dev/sdX]`<br><b>Delete a partition entry by number (data in sectors remains untouched)</b>`sudo sgdisk [[-d|--delete]] [1] [/dev/sdX]`<br><b>Save the current in-memory GPT data (protective MBR, headers, and table) to a binary backup file</b>`sudo sgdisk [[-b|--backup]] [/path/to/backup.gpt] [/dev/sdX]`<br><b>Load GPT data from a backup file (restoring from a non-original disk is not recommended)</b>`sudo sgdisk [[-l|--load-backup]] [/path/to/backup.gpt] [/dev/sdX]`<br><b>Verify GPT structures for CRC errors, mismatches, or inconsistencies</b>`sudo sgdisk [[-v|--verify]] [/dev/sdX]`<br><b>Display a summary of available partition type codes (no device required)</b>`sgdisk [[-L|--list-types]]`


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>zerotier-cli</b> <i>&lt;command&gt;</i> [<i>&lt;arguments&gt;</i>]<br>Many commands have their own specific options and arguments.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>help</b> [<i>&lt;command&gt;</i>]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays usage information for <i>zerotier-cli</i> or a specific subcommand.<br><br><b><b>info</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Show information about the local ZeroTier node, including status, address, and online/offline state.<br><br><b><b>status</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Provides the current operational status of the ZeroTier service.<br><br><b><b>listnetworks</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;List all ZeroTier networks the node is currently connected to or attempting to join.<br><br><b><b>join</b> <i>&lt;network_id&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Join a ZeroTier network using its 16-digit hexadecimal ID. Authorization might be required on the network controller.<br><br><b><b>leave</b> <i>&lt;network_id&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Leave a ZeroTier network, disconnecting from it.<br><br><b><b>listpeers</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;List all peer nodes currently connected or known to the local node, showing their address and status.<br><br><b><b>setprimaryport</b> <i>&lt;port&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Set the primary UDP port for the ZeroTier service (usually requires service restart).<br><br><b><b>getid</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Print the local ZeroTier node's 10-digit ID.<br><br><b><b>orbit</b> <i>&lt;world_id&gt; &lt;secret&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Establish a direct orbit connection to a known 'planet' (ZeroTier root server) for improved peering.<br><br><b><b>deorbit</b> <i>&lt;world_id&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Remove an established direct orbit connection.<br><br><b><b>dump</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Dump the full internal state of the ZeroTier node in JSON format, useful for debugging.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>zerotier-cli</i> is the command-line interface for the ZeroTier service, a peer-to-peer VPN solution that creates virtual Ethernet networks over the internet. It allows users to control and monitor their local ZeroTier node, join or leave virtual networks, view network status, list connected peers, and manage authorized devices. It acts as a client to the local <i>zerotier-one</i> service, enabling programmatic interaction with the ZeroTier network stack without needing a graphical user interface. This tool is essential for headless servers, automation scripts, and advanced users who require fine-grained control over their ZeroTier connections and configurations. It simplifies the management of secure, low-latency, and encrypted global area networks.


title: CAVEATS
content:
The <i>zerotier-one</i> service daemon must be running for <i>zerotier-cli</i> to function.<br>Certain commands, such as modifying system-wide settings or network interfaces, may require root or administrator privileges.<br>ZeroTier network IDs are 16-digit hexadecimal identifiers.<br>On many systems, <i>zerotier-cli</i> does not have a traditional <i>man</i> page; the primary documentation is available via <code>zerotier-cli help</code> and the official ZeroTier documentation.


title: USAGE WITH <I>ZEROTIER-ONE</I> DAEMON
content:
<i>zerotier-cli</i> communicates with the local <i>zerotier-one</i> service via its API socket. This daemon must be running in the background for any <i>zerotier-cli</i> command to execute successfully and interact with the ZeroTier network.


title: CONFIGURATION FILES
content:
ZeroTier's primary configuration and persistent data (such as node identity, network configurations, and certificates) are typically stored in a platform-specific directory. On Linux, this is commonly <code>/var/lib/zerotier-one</code>.


title: HISTORY
content:
ZeroTier was founded around 2012, aiming to create a global peer-to-peer virtual Ethernet network. <i>zerotier-cli</i> has been a fundamental component since the early days, providing a robust command-line interface to the <i>zerotier-one</i> daemon. Its development has focused on offering programmatic control over the ZeroTier network stack, making it indispensable for automation, scripting, and managing headless servers in various deployment scenarios. The command's structure and core functionality have remained consistent, reflecting ZeroTier's stable architecture.


title: TLDR
content:
<b>Join a network</b>`sudo zerotier-cli join [network_id]`<br><b>List networks</b>`sudo zerotier-cli listnetworks`<br><b>List peers in a readable format</b>`sudo zerotier-cli peers`<br><b>Leave a network</b>`sudo zerotier-cli leave [network_id]`<br><b>Display the status of ZeroTier One</b>`sudo zerotier-cli [[info|status]]`


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><B>-p</B> <I>&lt;port&gt;</I>, <B>--port</B> <I>&lt;port&gt;</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the UDP port for ZeroTier communications. The default port is 9993.<br><br><b><B>-d</B>, <B>--daemon</B></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Forks the `zerotier-one` process into the background, running it as a daemon.<br><br><b><B>-U</B> <I>&lt;path&gt;</I>, <B>--ui-path</B> <I>&lt;path&gt;</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the path to the web UI files, primarily used in desktop versions of ZeroTier.<br><br><b><B>-P</B> <I>&lt;pidfile&gt;</I>, <B>--pidfile</B> <I>&lt;pidfile&gt;</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Writes the process ID (PID) of the daemon to the specified file.<br><br><b><B>-C</B> <I>&lt;path&gt;</I>, <B>--config</B> <I>&lt;path&gt;</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the path to the configuration and data directory for ZeroTier. The default is typically <I>/var/lib/zerotier-one</I>.<br><br><b><B>-h</B>, <B>--help</B></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays a help message with all available command-line options and their descriptions.<br><br><b><B>-v</B>, <B>--version</B></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Shows the version information of the ZeroTier One daemon.<br><br><b><B>-l</B> <I>&lt;level&gt;</I>, <B>--log-level</B> <I>&lt;level&gt;</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the verbosity level for logging output. Valid levels include <I>info</I>, <I>debug</I>, <I>warning</I>, <I>error</I>, and <I>none</I>.<br><br><b><B>-q</B>, <B>--quiet</B></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Suppresses most output to standard output and standard error, useful when running as a daemon.<br><br><b><B>-6</B></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Explicitly enables the IPv6 listener. This is typically enabled by default.<br><br><b><B>-4</B></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Explicitly enables the IPv4 listener. This is typically enabled by default.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The `zerotier-one` command launches the core ZeroTier client daemon, a crucial component for establishing and managing secure, peer-to-peer virtual networks. This daemon allows your device to join ZeroTier virtual Layer 2 networks, enabling seamless communication with other devices on the same virtual network, regardless of their physical location or the underlying network infrastructure (LAN, WAN, cellular). It handles the encryption, routing, and management of virtual network interfaces, effectively creating a global area network (GAN) that operates like a traditional local area network. By doing so, `zerotier-one` simplifies complex networking challenges, offering a robust solution for remote access, IoT device management, secure multi-cloud connectivity, and building private networks without the complexities of traditional VPN setups or firewall port forwarding. It operates quietly in the background, maintaining connectivity and processing network traffic for all joined ZeroTier networks.


title: CAVEATS
content:
The `zerotier-one` daemon typically requires root privileges to start and manage network interfaces. Users often interact with it via `systemctl` for service management or `zerotier-cli` for client operations. Ensure firewall rules allow UDP traffic on port 9993 (or custom port) for optimal connectivity. ZeroTier relies on central root servers for initial peer discovery, though direct peer-to-peer connections are established afterward.


title: CONFIGURATION DIRECTORY
content:
The default configuration and data directory for `zerotier-one` on Linux systems is usually <I>/var/lib/zerotier-one</I>. This directory stores crucial information such as the device's identity (ID, private key), joined network configurations, and other persistent data needed for operation.


title: DAEMON VS. CLIENT TOOL
content:
It's important to distinguish between `zerotier-one` and `zerotier-cli`. `zerotier-one` is the background daemon that handles the actual network operations. `zerotier-cli` is a separate command-line tool used to interact with the running `zerotier-one` daemon, allowing users to join/leave networks, list interfaces, check status, and perform other administrative tasks.


title: NETWORK IDS
content:
ZeroTier virtual networks are identified by unique 16-digit hexadecimal Network IDs. To join a specific virtual network, you typically use `zerotier-cli join <NetworkID>`, which instructs the `zerotier-one` daemon to connect to that network.


title: HISTORY
content:
ZeroTier was founded by Adam Iredale in 2014, with the vision of simplifying network virtualization and connectivity. The `zerotier-one` daemon emerged as the core component of this innovative approach, aiming to abstract away the complexities of traditional networking and VPNs. It has since evolved into a widely adopted solution for secure, global, peer-to-peer networking, enabling a decentralized and resilient network infrastructure for various use cases, from IoT and remote access to multi-cloud environments.


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>asciiquarium</i> is a delightful and whimsical Linux command that transforms your terminal into a vibrant, animated ASCII art aquarium. Developed as a Perl script, it brings a peaceful underwater scene directly to your command line, complete with swimming fish, swaying seaweed, bubbles, and other marine life, all rendered using standard ASCII characters. It provides a unique blend of retro computing aesthetics and soothing visual entertainment. Perfect for a momentary escape during a coding session or just to add a touch of whimsy to your workstation, <i>asciiquarium</i> requires no complex setup. Simply execute the command, and your terminal will instantly become a living, breathing digital fish tank. It leverages the capabilities of modern terminals to display smooth, continuous animation, offering a charming visual break without leaving the console environment.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<i>asciiquarium</i> relies on a VT100 compatible terminal and sufficient terminal emulator capabilities to render its animations smoothly. Performance might vary on older or less capable terminals, or over slow SSH connections. It is a full-screen application and will take over your terminal until exited (usually by pressing <b>Ctrl+C</b>). Ensure your terminal supports a wide range of ASCII characters and colors for the best experience. While generally lightweight, continuous animation will consume some CPU cycles.


title: INSTALLATION
content:
<i>asciiquarium</i> is typically available through most Linux distribution's package managers (e.g., <b>apt install asciiquarium</b> on Debian/Ubuntu, <b>pacman -S asciiquarium</b> on Arch, or <b>dnf install asciiquarium</b> on Fedora). It can also be installed manually via CPAN if the Perl environment is set up.


title: EXITING THE ANIMATION
content:
To exit the <i>asciiquarium</i> animation and return to your command prompt, simply press <b>Ctrl+C</b>.


title: HISTORY
content:
<i>asciiquarium</i> originated as a Perl script by Kirk Baucom, leveraging the `Term::Animation` module. Its simplicity and charm quickly made it a popular terminal utility, especially among Linux and Unix enthusiasts looking for a lighthearted way to personalize their command-line environment. It became a staple in many package repositories, often installed as part of a collection of "amusement" utilities, demonstrating the enduring appeal of ASCII art and terminal-based entertainment in the modern computing landscape.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>package_name</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The name of the npm package to execute from the registry.<br><br><b>@version</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Optional</i>: Specifies a particular version of the package to use (e.g., `@latest`, `@1.0.0`). If omitted, the latest stable version is used.<br><br><b>script_path</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;A path to a local JavaScript or TypeScript file to execute directly.<br><br><b>arguments...</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Any additional arguments to pass directly to the executed binary or script.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The command &quot;bun-x&quot; as a standalone Linux command does <i>not</i> exist in standard distributions. This analysis is based on the interpretation of &quot;bun-x&quot; as `<b>bun x</b>`, which is a subcommand of the <i>Bun JavaScript runtime</i>. <br><br>`<b>bun x</b>` is designed for efficiently executing binaries or scripts from npm packages without explicit installation. It functions similarly to `npx` from Node.js or `yarn dlx` from Yarn, allowing developers to run command-line tools, scaffold new projects (e.g., `create-react-app`), or test package functionalities. <br><br>When `<b>bun x</b>` is invoked with a package name, Bun intelligently checks its cache. If the package is not found or an update is available, Bun downloads and caches the necessary files, then executes the specified binary or default script. This "on-demand" execution model streamlines workflows, reduces disk space by avoiding numerous global installations, and ensures the latest version of a tool is used unless a specific version is requested. It is a core utility for modern JavaScript and TypeScript development within the Bun ecosystem, emphasizing speed and developer convenience.


title: CAVEATS
content:
The command &quot;bun-x&quot; as a standalone Linux command does <i>not</i> exist in standard distributions. This analysis is based on the interpretation of &quot;bun-x&quot; as `<b>bun x</b>`, a subcommand of the <i>Bun JavaScript runtime</i>. Therefore, its usage requires the Bun runtime to be installed and configured on your system. This command's functionality is specific to the Bun ecosystem and JavaScript/TypeScript development.


title: CACHING MECHANISM
content:
Bun utilizes a sophisticated caching mechanism for packages executed via `<b>bun x</b>`. Once a package is downloaded, it's cached locally, significantly speeding up subsequent executions. This reduces redundant downloads and improves developer experience, especially for frequently used tools and commands.


title: LOCAL SCRIPT EXECUTION
content:
Beyond npm packages, `<b>bun x</b>` can also directly execute local JavaScript or TypeScript files. This provides a convenient way to run scripts without needing to mark them as executable or explicitly invoke a runtime like `bun run` or `node`. For example, `bun x ./my-script.ts`.


title: HISTORY
content:
The `<b>bun x</b>` subcommand was introduced as an integral part of the <i>Bun JavaScript runtime</i>, which was first publicly announced in 2022. Bun aims to be a unified JavaScript toolkit offering a runtime, bundler, and package manager. `<b>bun x</b>` was developed to provide a modern, high-performance alternative to existing solutions like `npx` and `yarn dlx`, inheriting Bun's focus on speed and efficiency. Its development is ongoing, evolving with the broader Bun ecosystem to support new web technologies and developer workflows.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>--help</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Show a help message and exit.</i><br><br><b>--debug</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Print extensive debug messages to stderr.</i><br><br><b>--server=<URL></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Specify the Koji hub URL for establishing connections.</i><br><br><b>--weburl=<URL></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Specify the URL for the Koji web user interface.</i><br><br><b>--config=<path></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Use an alternate Koji configuration file instead of the default.</i><br><br><b>--user=<username></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Specify the username to use for authentication with the Koji hub.</i><br><br><b>--password=<password></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Provide the password for the specified user (use with caution, discouraged).</i><br><br><b>--keytab=<path></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Use a Kerberos keytab file for secure authentication.</i><br><br><b>--principal=<principal></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Specify the Kerberos principal to use for authentication.</i><br><br><b>--no-krb</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Disable Kerberos authentication for the current connection.</i><br><br><b>--skip-auth</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Skip authentication entirely. Useful for calling publicly accessible API methods.</i><br><br><b>--api-url=<URL></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Directly specify the Koji API endpoint URL, overriding config.</i><br><br><b>--profile=<name></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Use a named configuration profile defined in the Koji configuration file.</i><br><br><b>--json-output</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Format the command's output as JSON, suitable for programmatic parsing.</i><br><br><b><I>method_name</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>The exact name of the Koji hub API method to be invoked (e.g., `listBuilds`, `getTag`).</i><br><br><b><I>param</I>=<I>value</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Key-value pairs representing parameters for the specified Koji method. Values are often interpreted as Python literals (e.g., `True`, `False`, `None`, numbers, lists), so strings must typically be quoted.</i><br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<b>koji-call</b> is a powerful, low-level command-line utility from the Koji client suite. It provides direct access to the Koji build system's hub API, allowing users to invoke any Koji hub method by name. This command is particularly useful for scripting, automation, and advanced debugging, offering granular control over Koji operations beyond what high-level <b>koji</b> commands provide.<br><br>Users specify the method name and its parameters as key-value pairs, which are then passed to the Koji hub. <b>koji-call</b> handles authentication, typically via Kerberos or GSSAPI, using the configured Koji client settings. The output is usually a Python representation of the method's return value, or optionally JSON, making it suitable for programmatic parsing. It's an essential tool for Koji administrators and developers needing to interact with the Koji hub's full range of capabilities.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<b>koji-call</b> requires precise knowledge of Koji hub API method names and their expected parameter types. Incorrect method names or malformed parameters will result in errors from the Koji hub.<br><br>The command's output, especially without <b>--json-output</b>, is often a Python representation that may require further parsing or evaluation in scripting contexts. Using <b>--password</b> on the command line is insecure and generally discouraged; prefer Kerberos or other secure authentication methods.


title: <B>KOJI API INTERACTION</B>
content:
<i><b>koji-call</b> is the primary CLI method for direct interaction with the Koji XML-RPC/JSON-RPC API. It bypasses higher-level abstractions, making it suitable for advanced scripting where specific Koji hub functions need to be precisely controlled.</i>


title: <B>PARAMETER HANDLING</B>
content:
<i>Parameters supplied as `key=value` pairs are often interpreted using Python's `eval` or similar mechanisms on the Koji client side before being sent to the hub. This means that Python literals (e.g., `True`, `False`, `None`, numbers, lists, dictionaries) can often be passed directly, while strings must typically be quoted (e.g., `name="my-build"`).</i>


title: HISTORY
content:
The Koji build system, developed by Red Hat, has been a cornerstone for building Fedora and other RPM-based distributions since the mid-2000s. <b>koji-call</b> emerged as part of the Koji client toolset, providing a necessary low-level interface to the Koji hub's extensive API. Its development paralleled the growth of Koji itself, offering a flexible way for developers and administrators to automate complex tasks, script custom workflows, and perform advanced diagnostics that might not be covered by the higher-level <b>koji</b> commands. Its design reflects the need for direct programmatic control over the build system's functions.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><i>FILE</i>...</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;One or more diagram files to open. If no files are specified, Dia starts with a new empty diagram.<br><br><b>-h</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays a help message with available command-line options.<br><br><b>--help</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Same as -h, displays a help message.<br><br><b>-v</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Prints Dia's version information and exits.<br><br><b>--version</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Same as -v, prints Dia's version information.<br><br><b>-e <FILE></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Exports the specified input file to the given output <I>FILE</I>. Useful for batch conversion.<br><br><b>--export=<FILE></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Same as -e, exports the input file to the given output <I>FILE</I>.<br><br><b>-t <TYPE></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the export type (format) when using the -e or --export option. E.g., 'png', 'svg', 'ps'.<br><br><b>--export-type=<TYPE></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Same as -t, specifies the export type.<br><br><b>-s <SIZE></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the page size for printing or exporting. E.g., 'A4', 'Letter'.<br><br><b>--size=<SIZE></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Same as -s, sets the page size.<br><br><b>-p</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Prints the specified input file to the default printer without opening the GUI.<br><br><b>--print</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Same as -p, prints the input file.<br><br><b>-o <FORMAT></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the output format for printing (e.g., 'PostScript').<br><br><b>--output-format=<FORMAT></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Same as -o, specifies the output format for printing.<br><br><b>--sheet-background</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;When exporting or printing, includes the sheet background in the output.<br><br><b>--no-splash</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Suppresses the display of the splash screen when Dia starts up.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
Dia is a <i>free and open-source diagramming software</i> for creating various types of diagrams on Linux, Windows, and macOS. Inspired by Microsoft Visio, it provides a comprehensive set of tools for drawing structured diagrams like <i>flowcharts</i>, <i>UML diagrams</i>, <i>network diagrams</i>, <i>electrical circuits</i>, and more. <br><br>While primarily a graphical user interface (GUI) application, Dia can also be invoked from the command line to open files or perform batch operations such as <i>exporting diagrams to different formats</i> or <i>printing them</i> without opening the GUI. It supports a wide range of export formats including PNG, JPEG, SVG, EPS, PS, DXF, and VDX (Visio XML). Its extensibility through custom shapes and Python scripting makes it a versatile tool for professionals and students alike.<br><br>Developed as part of the GNOME project, Dia aims to be a robust and easy-to-use application for diagramming needs, emphasizing clarity and functionality.


title: CAVEATS
content:
Dia is primarily a <i>Graphical User Interface (GUI) application</i>. While it offers command-line options for opening files, exporting, and printing, its full power and interactive editing capabilities are accessed through its graphical interface. Command-line usage is generally limited to quick launches or <i>batch processing tasks</i> rather than complex scripting of diagram creation.


title: SUPPORTED DIAGRAM TYPES
content:
Dia supports a wide array of diagram types out-of-the-box, including <i>flowcharts</i>, <i>UML class diagrams</i>, <i>entity-relationship diagrams</i>, <i>network diagrams</i>, <i>circuit diagrams</i>, and more. Users can also extend its capabilities by creating custom shapes and sheets.


title: EXTENSIBILITY
content:
Users can create <i>custom shapes and stencils</i> to extend Dia's functionality. It also supports <i>Python scripting</i>, allowing for automation and advanced diagram manipulation, though this is typically done within the GUI or via specific Python modules rather than direct command-line scripting.


title: HISTORY
content:
Dia originated in 1998 as part of the <i>GNOME project</i>, aiming to be a free and open-source alternative to proprietary diagramming software like Microsoft Visio. It quickly gained traction for its simplicity and effectiveness in creating various technical and non-technical diagrams. Over the years, it has been ported to multiple operating systems, including Linux, Windows, and macOS, maintaining its commitment to providing a versatile diagramming solution. Its development has focused on stability, extensibility, and broad format support.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-f</b>, <b>--format</b> <i>&lt;output_format&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the desired output format (e.g., pdf, doc, odt, html). <br>Use <b>unoconv --list</b> to see available formats.<br><br><b><b>-o</b>, <b>--output</b> <i>&lt;output_file_or_directory&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Defines the output file path or a directory for multiple conversions. By default, output is in the same directory as input.<br><br><b><b>-e</b>, <b>--export</b> <i>&lt;option=value&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Passes export-specific options to LibreOffice (e.g., 'PageRange=1-2' for PDF export, 'FilterOptions=9,99,76,1,0' for CSV). Can be used multiple times.<br><br><b><b>-i</b>, <b>--import</b> <i>&lt;option=value&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Passes import-specific options to LibreOffice (e.g., 'FilterName=HTML (StarWriter)' for importing HTML). Can be used multiple times.<br><br><b><b>-p</b>, <b>--port</b> <i>&lt;port_number&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the port for the LibreOffice listener (default is 2002).<br><br><b><b>-l</b>, <b>--listener</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Starts an unoconv listener service that processes requests from other unoconv instances. Useful for a dedicated conversion server.<br><br><b><b>-s</b>, <b>--server</b> <i>&lt;host[:port]&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Connects to a unoconv listener running on a specified host and optional port, rather than a local LibreOffice process directly.<br><br><b><b>-r</b>, <b>--reuse</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;If a LibreOffice listener is not found, unoconv will start one and keep it alive for future conversions, improving performance for multiple tasks.<br><br><b><b>-c</b>, <b>--connection</b> <i>&lt;connection_string&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Directly specifies the LibreOffice connection string (e.g., 'socket,host=localhost,port=2002;urp;StarOffice.ComponentContext').<br><br><b><b>-v</b>, <b>--verbose</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enables verbose output, showing more details about the conversion process and debugging information.<br><br><b><b>-h</b>, <b>--help</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays a help message with command options and exits.<br><br><b><b>--stdout</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Writes the converted output directly to standard output instead of a file. Useful for piping output.<br><br><b><b>--base-directory</b> <i>&lt;path&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the base directory for output files when converting multiple documents, preserving input directory structure.<br><br><b><b>--template</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Treats the input file as a LibreOffice template (e.g., <i>.ott</i>, <i>.otp</i>) for conversion, using it to create a new document.<br><br><b><b>--list</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Lists all supported input and output formats.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<b>unoconv</b> is a powerful command-line utility for converting any document format that LibreOffice or OpenOffice can read and write, into any other format supported by these office suites. Written in Python, it acts as a wrapper, communicating with a running LibreOffice or OpenOffice instance (typically in headless mode) to perform the actual conversions. This makes it incredibly versatile for automating document transformations, such as converting <b>DOCX</b> to <b>PDF</b>, <b>ODT</b> to <b>HTML</b>, or <i>XLS</i> to <i>CSV</i>, without requiring a graphical user interface. It's particularly useful in server environments, scripting, and batch processing tasks where consistent and high-quality document conversions are needed. <b>unoconv</b> handles a wide range of formats including word processing documents, spreadsheets, presentations, and drawings, making it a go-to tool for document interoperability.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<b>unoconv</b> relies heavily on a functioning LibreOffice or OpenOffice installation. For server-side usage, it's crucial to run LibreOffice in headless mode (e.g., <b>libreoffice --headless --accept='socket,host=127.0.0.1,port=2002;urp;' --nodefault --nofirststartwizard --nolockcheck --nologo --norestore</b>).<br><br>Without a persistent LibreOffice listener, <b>unoconv</b> might launch a new LibreOffice instance for each conversion, which can be resource-intensive and slow. Using the <b>--reuse</b> option or manually starting a listener is highly recommended for performance.<br><br>Export filters and their options can be complex and sometimes undocumented, requiring experimentation. Ensure the appropriate LibreOffice packages are installed for all desired conversion types (e.g., <i>libreoffice-writer</i>, <i>libreoffice-calc</i>, etc.).


title: COMMON USAGE EXAMPLES
content:
Convert a DOCX file to PDF:<br> <b>unoconv -f pdf document.docx</b><br><br>Convert an ODT file to HTML in a specific output directory:<br> <b>unoconv -f html -o /tmp/output/ document.odt</b><br><br>Convert a spreadsheet to CSV, specifying a semicolon (;) as field separator:<br> <b>unoconv -f csv -e 'FilterOptions=44,34,76,1,0,true,true' spreadsheet.ods</b><br><br>Convert multiple files to PDF, reusing a listener for efficiency:<br> <b>unoconv -f pdf --reuse file1.doc file2.ppt</b>


title: STARTING A HEADLESS LIBREOFFICE LISTENER
content:
For optimal performance and reliability, it is highly recommended to start a LibreOffice instance in headless (server) mode once, and let <b>unoconv</b> connect to it for subsequent conversions. This avoids the overhead of launching LibreOffice for each conversion request.<br><br>Command to start a listener (often run in a background process or service manager):<br><b>libreoffice --headless --accept='socket,host=127.0.0.1,port=2002;urp;' --nodefault --nofirststartwizard --nolockcheck --nologo --norestore &</b><br><br>Then, <b>unoconv</b> will automatically connect to this listener on the default port (2002) or you can specify it using <b>-p</b>.


title: HISTORY
content:
<b>unoconv</b> was developed as a Python script to provide a robust, command-line interface for document conversions, leveraging the Universal Network Objects (UNO) API of OpenOffice.org (later LibreOffice). Its inception aimed to simplify the process of automating document conversions in headless environments, addressing the need for server-side document processing without a graphical interface. Over time, it gained popularity due to its reliability and the comprehensive format support inherited from LibreOffice, becoming a staple tool for web services, document management systems, and batch processing workflows that require programmatic document transformation.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-v</b>, <b>--version</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays the version number of Gnumeric and exits.<br><br><b><b>-s</b>, <b>--sheet</b>=<i>SHEETNAME</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Opens the specified spreadsheet file directly to the sheet named <i>SHEETNAME</i>.<br><br><b><b>-G</b>, <b>--geometry</b>=<i>GEOMETRY</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the initial size and position of the Gnumeric window using standard X geometry specifications (e.g., <i>800x600+10+10</i>).<br><br><b><b>--display</b>=<i>DISPLAY</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the X display to use for Gnumeric.<br><br><b><b>--no-splash</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Prevents Gnumeric from displaying its splash screen on startup.<br><br><b><b>--convert-to</b>=<i>FORMAT</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Converts the input file(s) to the specified <i>FORMAT</i> and exits without opening the GUI. Use with <b>--output</b>.<br><br><b><b>--output</b>=<i>FILE</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;When used with <b>--convert-to</b>, specifies the output file name for the conversion result.<br><br><b><b>--recalc</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Forces a recalculation of all formulas in the loaded workbook(s) on startup.<br><br><b><b>--check-file</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Checks the consistency and integrity of the specified Gnumeric file(s).<br><br><b><b>--help</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays a help message with command-line options and exits.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<b>Gnumeric</b> is a high-performance spreadsheet program that forms a core part of the <I>GNOME Free Software Desktop Project</I>. It is designed as a free and open-source alternative to proprietary spreadsheets, emphasizing accuracy, extensibility, and broad file format compatibility. <br><br>Users can perform complex calculations, create data visualizations, and manage large datasets. Its feature set includes a wide array of mathematical, statistical, and financial functions, conditional formatting, pivot tables, and support for various charts. Gnumeric aims to be highly interoperable, supporting its native <i>.gnm</i> format, <I>Microsoft Excel</I> (<i>.xls</i>, <i>.xlsx</i>), <I>OpenDocument Spreadsheet</I> (<i>.ods</i>), <i>CSV</i>, <i>HTML</i>, and more, making it suitable for diverse data management tasks.


title: CAVEATS
content:
While Gnumeric offers extensive file format support, complex features or macros from proprietary formats (e.g., <I>Microsoft Excel</I>) may not be perfectly preserved or fully functional upon import or export. Users should verify critical data and functionality when working with cross-application files. Performance on extremely large datasets might vary depending on system resources.


title: EXTENSIVE FILE FORMAT SUPPORT
content:
Gnumeric supports an impressive array of file formats for both import and export, ensuring high interoperability. This includes its native <i>.gnm</i> format, <I>Microsoft Excel</I> (<i>.xls</i>, <i>.xlsx</i>), <I>OpenDocument Spreadsheet</I> (<i>.ods</i>), <I>Comma Separated Values</I> (<i>.csv</i>), <I>HTML</I>, <I>LaTeX</I>, <I>Postscript</I>, and more. This flexibility makes it an excellent tool for data exchange across different platforms and applications.


title: PLUGIN ARCHITECTURE AND SCRIPTING
content:
Gnumeric features a robust plugin architecture, allowing users to extend its capabilities. This includes plugins for advanced statistical analysis, specialized financial functions, and unique data import/export requirements. Furthermore, Gnumeric supports scripting via <I>Python</I>, providing powerful automation and customization options for users who need to tailor the application to specific workflows or integrate it with other tools.


title: HISTORY
content:
<b>Gnumeric</b> was initiated by <I>Miguel de Icaza</I> in 1998 as a fundamental part of the <I>GNOME</I> desktop environment. The project's goal was to create a free and open-source spreadsheet application that prioritized accuracy and functional completeness. Over the years, Gnumeric has evolved with a strong focus on numerical precision, a rich set of statistical and mathematical functions, and broad compatibility with various file formats, establishing itself as a robust and reliable alternative in the spreadsheet software landscape.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>--help</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display a help message with available command-line options.<br><br><b>--version</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Show the program's version information.<br><br><b>--tab=<I>tab_name</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Open <I>pavucontrol</I> directly to a specific tab. Valid <I>tab_name</I> values include `playback`, `recording`, `output`, `input`, and `configuration`. For example, `pavucontrol --tab=configuration` will open the Configuration tab.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<I>pavucontrol</I> is a <I>GTK-based graphical user interface</I> (GUI) application designed to provide comprehensive control over the <I>PulseAudio sound server</I>. It allows users to manage various aspects of their audio setup with ease and precision, going beyond the basic functionalities of standard desktop volume applets. Through its intuitive interface, users can adjust volume levels for individual playback and recording streams, switch between available output and input devices, and configure per-application audio settings. <br><br> The application also offers the ability to set device profiles (e.g., stereo, surround sound, analog/digital output) and visualize audio levels for both input and output, aiding in troubleshooting and optimal setup. It is an essential tool for anyone running a Linux system with PulseAudio, providing granular control over sound routing, mixing, and device management, making it an indispensable component for a polished audio experience.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<I>pavucontrol</I> is a GUI application and thus requires a graphical environment to run. It directly interacts with the <I>PulseAudio sound server</I>, meaning PulseAudio must be running for the application to function correctly. It is not suitable for command-line scripting or use on headless servers; for those scenarios, <I>pactl</I> or <I>pacmd</I> are more appropriate alternatives.


title: KEY INTERFACE TABS
content:
<I>pavucontrol</I> organizes its functionalities into several distinct tabs, each serving a specific purpose: <br> <ul><li><B>Playback</B>: Manages all currently playing audio streams, allowing per-application volume control and output device selection.</li><li><B>Recording</B>: Controls active recording streams, enabling input source selection and per-application input volume adjustment.</li><li><B>Output Devices</B>: Displays and allows configuration of all available audio output devices (speakers, headphones), including their volume and mute states.</li><li><B>Input Devices</B>: Lists and configures all available audio input devices (microphones, line-in), managing their volume, mute states, and input sources.</li><li><B>Configuration</B>: Enables setting profiles for each audio device, allowing users to select between different modes like stereo analog output, surround sound, or digital output, depending on the device's capabilities.</li></ul>


title: HISTORY
content:
<I>pavucontrol</I> emerged as a crucial component of the <I>PulseAudio</I> project, designed to provide a much-needed user-friendly graphical interface for managing the advanced capabilities of the sound server. Prior to its development, managing PulseAudio often involved using less intuitive command-line tools like <I>pactl</I> or simple, often limited, desktop environment-specific volume applets. <br><br> Its creation addressed the demand for granular control over individual streams, devices, and profiles in a visual manner, significantly improving the user experience for PulseAudio users. It quickly became the standard graphical mixer for many Linux distributions that adopted PulseAudio, solidifying its role as an indispensable utility for audio management.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>colordctl</b> [<b>--help</b>|<b>--version</b>|<b>--verbose</b>|<b>--log-level</b>=<I>level</I>] <I>COMMAND</I> [<I>COMMAND_OPTIONS</I>] [<I>ARGUMENTS</I>]<br><br>Common examples:<br><b>colordctl device list</b><br><b>colordctl profile list</b><br><b>colordctl import-profile</b> <I>path/to/profile.icc</I><br><b>colordctl set-preferred-profile</b> <I>device-id</I> <I>profile-id</I>


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>--help</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays a help message for the command or a specific subcommand.<br><br><b><b>--version</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Shows the <b>colordctl</b> version information.<br><br><b><b>--verbose</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enables verbose output for more detailed information during execution.<br><br><b><b>--log-level</b>=<I>level</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the logging level (e.g., 'debug', 'info', 'warning', 'error').<br><br><b><b>device list</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Lists all color-managed devices known to the <I>colord</I> daemon.<br><br><b><b>device get-profiles</b> <I>device-id</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Retrieves the list of profiles associated with a specific device identified by its ID.<br><br><b><b>profile list</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Lists all registered color profiles available in the system.<br><br><b><b>profile info</b> <I>profile-id</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays detailed information about a specific color profile identified by its ID.<br><br><b><b>import-profile</b> <I>path-to-icc</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Imports an ICC profile from a specified file into the <I>colord</I> system.<br><br><b><b>dump-profile</b> <I>profile-id</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Dumps the raw ICC profile data for a given profile ID to standard output.<br><br><b><b>set-preferred-profile</b> <I>device-id</I> <I>profile-id</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets a specific profile as the preferred one for a designated device.<br><br><b><b>get-color</b> [<I>sensor-id</I>]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Measures a color using a connected color sensor, if available, or from a display area.<br><br><b><b>calibrate</b> <I>device-id</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Initiates a calibration process for the specified device, often launching a graphical wizard.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <b>colordctl</b> command-line tool interacts with the <I>colord</I> system daemon, which provides a comprehensive solution for color management on Linux. It allows users and system administrators to query, configure, and manage color profiles for various input and output devices such as displays, printers, scanners, and cameras.<br><br><b>colordctl</b> serves as the primary interface for tasks like listing connected devices, inspecting their assigned color profiles, importing new ICC profiles, and even initiating device calibration processes. By centralizing color management, <b>colordctl</b> helps ensure consistent and accurate color representation across different hardware, crucial for professional design, photography, and consistent user experience. It typically leverages D-Bus for communication with the running <I>colord</I> daemon.


title: CAVEATS
content:
Many <b>colordctl</b> operations, especially those modifying system settings or device assignments, require root privileges or specific user permissions (e.g., via <b>sudo</b>).<br><br>The <I>colord</I> daemon must be running for <b>colordctl</b> to function correctly. Some commands, like <b>calibrate</b> or <b>get-color</b>, may require specific hardware (e.g., a colorimeter) or a graphical environment (X11/Wayland) to fully operate.<br><br>Device IDs and profile IDs can often be long, cryptic strings, requiring careful copying and pasting.


title: INTEGRATING WITH DESKTOP ENVIRONMENTS
content:
<b>colordctl</b> forms the backbone for color management in many Linux desktop environments. Tools like GNOME Color Manager and KDE's system settings often use <I>colord</I> and its profiles behind the scenes to provide a user-friendly interface for display calibration and profile assignment, making complex color management accessible to end-users.


title: COMMON WORKFLOW FOR DISPLAY CALIBRATION
content:
A typical workflow for display calibration involves using <I>colordctl</I> (or its GUI frontends) in conjunction with a colorimeter. First, connect the colorimeter to the system. Then, use <b>colordctl calibrate <I>device-id</I></b> to start the calibration process, which usually guides the user through measuring various colors displayed on the screen to generate a new, accurate ICC profile for the specific display.


title: HISTORY
content:
The <I>colord</I> project, including <b>colordctl</b>, was initiated by Richard Hughes (Red Hat) around 2010. It aimed to provide a standardized, integrated color management solution for Linux, replacing disparate and often complex configurations. <b>colordctl</b> has been the primary command-line interface for interacting with the <I>colord</I> daemon since its early development, facilitating its adoption and integration into desktop environments like GNOME (via GNOME Color Manager) and KDE.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>-V, --version</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays version information and exits.<br><br><b>-Q, --query</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Queries the drive for CD-ROM device and disc information.<br><br><b>-d <device>, --device=<device></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the CD-ROM device to use (e.g., <i>/dev/sr0</i>).<br><br><b>-s, --search-for-drive</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Attempts to automatically detect the CD-ROM device.<br><br><b>-Z, --disable-paranoia</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Disables all data verification and error correction routines, making it faster but less accurate.<br><br><b>-Y, --disable-extra-paranoia</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Disables only the most aggressive error correction, keeping basic verification.<br><br><b>-X, --disable-skip</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Prevents skipping over uncorrectable sectors; instead, it attempts to read them repeatedly.<br><br><b>-P, --force-paranoia</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Forces full paranoia checking, even if the drive reports it can do error correction internally.<br><br><b>-S <speed>, --force-speed=<speed></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Forces the CD-ROM drive speed (e.g., <i>2</i> for 2x).<br><br><b>-t <track>, --track=<track></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies a single track to extract.<br><br><b>-N, --never-skip</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Never skips sectors, always retries, potentially taking a very long time.<br><br><b>-L, --list-tracks</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Lists the tracks on the current disc and exits.<br><br><b>-w, --wav-file</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Outputs the extracted audio as a WAV file.<br><br><b>-v, --verbose</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Increases verbosity, showing more information about the ripping process.<br><br><b>-q, --quiet</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Suppresses non-essential output, only showing errors.<br><br><b>-B, --batch</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Extracts all audio tracks on the disc sequentially.<br><br><b>-F, --force-overread</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Forces the drive to attempt reading past the end of the data track for jitter correction.<br><br><b>-p, --pragma-sectors</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies sectors instead of tracks for extraction. Useful for extracting parts of a track.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<b>cdparanoia</b> is a sophisticated command-line utility designed for extracting digital audio from compact discs (CDDA) with exceptional accuracy. Unlike simpler CD ripping tools, <b>cdparanoia</b> employs a set of advanced error detection and correction algorithms, often referred to as "paranoia mode," to ensure that the extracted audio data is free from jitters, skips, and other digital artifacts, even when dealing with scratched or imperfect discs. It achieves this by performing multiple reads of questionable sectors, comparing the data, and using intelligent heuristics to reconstruct the correct audio stream. This makes it an invaluable tool for archiving audio CDs, especially when source material quality is a concern. It typically outputs raw PCM audio data or WAV files, which can then be further processed or encoded into other formats. Its focus is purely on the reliable extraction of the digital audio stream from the disc.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<ul><li><b>No direct MP3 encoding:</b> <b>cdparanoia</b> extracts raw audio (PCM) or WAV files. Users need external tools like LAME or FFmpeg to encode to MP3 or other lossy formats.</li><li><b>Speed vs. Accuracy:</b> While it can rip quickly by disabling paranoia, its primary strength lies in its meticulous, and thus slower, error correction. Ripping heavily damaged discs can be extremely time-consuming.</li><li><b>Hardware Dependency:</b> The effectiveness of <b>cdparanoia</b> can depend on the quality and features of the CD-ROM drive, as some drives have better error handling or reporting capabilities than others.</li><li><b>CD-ROM Device Naming:</b> Device names (e.g., <i>/dev/sr0</i>, <i>/dev/cdrom</i>) can vary between Linux distributions and systems, requiring the <i>--device</i> option.</li></ul>


title: OUTPUT FORMATS
content:
<b>cdparanoia</b> primarily outputs raw 16-bit 44.1kHz stereo PCM data to standard output by default, which can be piped to other programs. The <i>-w</i> option allows direct output to a WAV file. It does not natively support other audio formats like MP3, FLAC, or Ogg Vorbis, requiring separate encoding steps.


title: ERROR CORRECTION PHILOSOPHY
content:
The tool's "paranoia" mode isn't just about re-reading bad sectors; it involves sophisticated algorithms that look for inconsistencies, synchronize read data, and perform jitter correction. It attempts to detect and correct errors without altering the original audio content, preferring to report uncorrectable errors rather than guessing.


title: BATCH RIPPING
content:
For convenience, <b>cdparanoia</b> supports ripping entire discs automatically using the <i>-B</i> (batch) option, which extracts all audio tracks sequentially to numbered WAV files or stdout.


title: HISTORY
content:
<b>cdparanoia</b> was developed by the <I>Xiph.Org Foundation</I>, known for its open-source multimedia projects like Ogg Vorbis and FLAC. Its development began in the late 1990s with a focus on creating a robust and reliable CDDA extractor, addressing common issues like jitter, read errors, and inaccurate sample positioning that plagued earlier ripping tools. The name "paranoia" reflects its aggressive and meticulous approach to verifying every single audio sample, contrasting with tools that simply extract data without such rigorous checks. It quickly gained recognition within the Linux and open-source communities as the gold standard for accurate digital audio extraction, becoming a foundational component in many audio workflows and other ripping frontends. While the core project saw less active development in the 2010s, its principles and code remain influential, often integrated into or inspiring features in modern audio software.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-v</b>, <b>--version</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display the version information of the <b>cgget</b> utility.<br><br><b><b>-h</b>, <b>--help</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Show the help message and exit.<br><br><b><b>-r</b> <i>&lt;name&gt;</i>, <b>--recursive</b>=<i>&lt;name&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Recursively read the specified parameter <i>&lt;name&gt;</i> for the cgroup and its children.<br><br><b><b>-a</b>, <b>--all-controllers</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Read parameters for all controllers attached to the specified cgroup.<br><br><b><b>-g</b> <i>&lt;controller&gt;</i>:<i>&lt;cgroup&gt;</i>, <b>--group</b>=<i>&lt;controller&gt;</i>:<i>&lt;cgroup&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the cgroup and its controller to work with. This is an alternative way to define the target cgroup and controller.<br><br><b><b>-R</b>, <b>--recursive</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Recursively read all parameters for all controllers in the specified cgroup and its children. This is a broader version of <b>-r</b>.<br><br><b><b>-n</b>, <b>--numeric</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display numeric values for parameters where applicable, rather than human-readable ones.<br><br><b><b>-s</b>, <b>--skip-empty</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Skip displaying parameters that have empty values, making the output more concise.<br><br><b><b>-f</b> <i>&lt;file&gt;</i>, <b>--file</b>=<i>&lt;file&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Read parameters from a specific file within the cgroup filesystem, rather than automatically discovering them based on the controller.<br><br><b><b>-l</b>, <b>--list-parameters</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;List all valid parameters for the given cgroup and controller, without actually retrieving their values. Useful for discovering available attributes.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<b>cgget</b> is a utility from the libcgroup tools suite designed to retrieve and display parameters or attributes associated with control groups (cgroups). Cgroups are a Linux kernel feature that allows for the allocation, prioritization, denial, management, and monitoring of system resources among groups of processes. <b>cgget</b> enables administrators and users to inspect the current state and configuration of specific cgroups or controllers within a cgroup hierarchy. It can show attributes for an entire cgroup, or specific controllers (subsystems) attached to it, providing insights into resource limits, usage, and other operational data. It's an essential tool for monitoring and troubleshooting cgroup configurations.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<ul><li><b>cgget</b> requires the cgroup filesystem to be properly mounted to access cgroup information.</li><li>Appropriate read permissions are necessary to query cgroup files; lack of permissions will result in errors.</li><li>The output format and available parameters are dependent on the specific kernel version and the active cgroup controllers.</li><li>Interpreting the output requires a basic understanding of cgroup controllers (e.g., cpu, memory, blkio) and their respective parameters.</li></ul>


title: HISTORY
content:
The <b>cgget</b> command is part of the <i>libcgroup</i> tools, which were developed to provide a user-space interface for managing Linux Control Groups (cgroups). Cgroups were introduced into the Linux kernel starting around version 2.6.24. The <i>libcgroup</i> project and its utilities like <b>cgget</b> emerged to simplify interaction with this powerful kernel feature, allowing system administrators and developers to easily inspect and configure resource management policies for processes. Its usage has grown alongside the increasing adoption of cgroups for containerization technologies, such as Docker and LXC, and for general system resource management.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>cgset</b> [<b>-r</b>|<b>--recursive</b>] [<b>-s</b>|<b>--stat</b> <I>name</I>=<I>value</I>] <I>cgroup_path</I>


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-s</b> <I>name</I>=<I>value</I>, <b>--stat</b> <I>name</I>=<I>value</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the specified cgroup parameter (<i>name</i>) to the given <i>value</i>. The <i>name</i> typically follows the format <i>controller.parameter_file</i> (e.g., cpu.shares, memory.limit_in_bytes) and corresponds to a file within the cgroup's virtual filesystem.<br><br><b><b>-r</b>, <b>--recursive</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Applies the setting recursively to all sub-cgroups within the specified <i>cgroup_path</i>, ensuring that child groups inherit or are updated with the same parameter value.<br><br><b><b>-h</b>, <b>--help</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays a concise help message detailing command usage and options, then exits.<br><br><b><b>-v</b>, <b>--version</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays the version information for the <b>cgset</b> utility and then exits.<br><br><b><I>cgroup_path</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The absolute path to the target control group within the cgroup hierarchy that needs to be modified (e.g., /user.slice/mygroup). This path determines which specific cgroup's parameters will be affected.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <b>cgset</b> command is a utility from the <I>cgroup-tools</I> package, designed to dynamically modify parameters and settings of existing Linux control groups (cgroups). Cgroups are a powerful kernel feature that allow administrators to limit, account for, and isolate the resource usage (such as CPU, memory, network I/O, and disk I/O) of collections of processes. <br><br>With <b>cgset</b>, you can adjust various resource limits and properties for specific cgroups, thereby influencing the behavior and resource consumption of processes associated with those groups. It operates by writing specified values to control files within the cgroup virtual filesystem, which the kernel then interprets to enforce the desired resource management policies.


title: CAVEATS
content:
Using <b>cgset</b> typically requires root privileges because it directly manipulates system resource allocations. The specified cgroup must already exist in the cgroup hierarchy. Supplying incorrect parameter names or invalid values can lead to errors or undesirable system behavior. A solid understanding of cgroup controllers and their specific parameters is crucial before making any changes.


title: CGROUP FILESYSTEM INTERACTION
content:
Under the hood, <b>cgset</b> translates command-line arguments into direct writes to control files exposed by the kernel via the cgroup virtual filesystem, which is commonly mounted at <I>/sys/fs/cgroup</I>. For instance, running `<b>cgset -s cpu.shares=512 /mygroup</b>` effectively writes the string "512" into the file <I>/sys/fs/cgroup/cpu/mygroup/cpu.shares</I>, instructing the kernel to adjust the CPU shares for that group.


title: PERMISSIONS AND SECURITY
content:
Modifying cgroup parameters has direct implications for system resource allocation and can affect overall system stability and performance. Consequently, these operations almost invariably require superuser (root) privileges. It is critical to restrict access to <b>cgset</b> and similar cgroup manipulation tools to authorized users to maintain system security and integrity.


title: HISTORY
content:
<b>cgset</b> is an integral component of the <I>cgroup-tools</I> suite, a collection of utilities developed to provide user-space interaction with the Linux kernel's control group (cgroup) feature. Its functionality has been consistent since its inception, evolving with the kernel's cgroup implementation (from v1 to v2) while maintaining its core purpose of modifying controller-specific parameters via the cgroup filesystem interface.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-h</b>, <b>--help</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display a help message and exit.<br><br><b><b>-v</b>, <b>--version</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Show version information and exit.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>lscgroup</i> is a command-line utility from the <i>libcgroup</i> tools package, designed to display information about the Linux control group (cgroup) hierarchies currently mounted on the system. It provides a high-level overview of how cgroups are organized, showing each distinct hierarchy, the cgroup controllers (subsystems) associated with it, and its mount point within the <i>cgroupfs</i> virtual filesystem. <br><br>This command is crucial for understanding the current cgroup setup, identifying which resource management controllers (like CPU, memory, I/O) are active, and where they are located in the filesystem. Unlike other tools that list individual cgroups, <i>lscgroup</i> focuses solely on the top-level hierarchy structure. It helps system administrators and developers verify the configuration of resource isolation and allocation policies. While primarily associated with cgroup v1, it can also reflect the unified cgroup v2 hierarchy if it's in use.


title: CAVEATS
content:
Users typically need appropriate permissions, often root privileges, to fully access and interpret cgroup filesystem information, although listing hierarchies usually works for non-root users if the cgroup filesystems are readable.<br><br><i>lscgroup</i> only displays the top-level cgroup hierarchies and their associated controllers; it does not list individual cgroups or tasks within those hierarchies. For detailed information about specific cgroups, other tools like <i>cgget</i> or direct inspection of the <i>/sys/fs/cgroup</i> paths are required.<br><br>Its output primarily reflects the Cgroup v1 multi-hierarchy model, but it can also show the unified Cgroup v2 hierarchy if it's mounted. Understanding which cgroup version is in use on your system is important for interpreting the output correctly.


title: OUTPUT FORMAT
content:
The output of <i>lscgroup</i> typically presents each cgroup hierarchy on a new line, showing its unique identifier (often a numeric ID), the name of the hierarchy (or "name=systemd" for the unified hierarchy), a comma-separated list of cgroup controllers (subsystems) attached to that hierarchy, and the mount point path in the virtual <i>cgroupfs</i> filesystem (e.g., <i>/sys/fs/cgroup/cpu,cpuacct</i>). This provides a quick overview of which resource types are being managed together within each distinct cgroup tree.


title: CGROUP VERSIONS
content:
Linux control groups have two main versions: <b>Cgroup v1</b> and <b>Cgroup v2</b>. <i>lscgroup</i> can display information for both. Cgroup v1 allows multiple independent hierarchies, where different controllers can be mounted separately (e.g., CPU on one hierarchy, memory on another). Cgroup v2 introduces a unified hierarchy, where all controllers are managed under a single tree. The output of <i>lscgroup</i> will show separate lines for v1 hierarchies and typically one line for the unified v2 hierarchy if it's mounted, often named "name=systemd" or similar.


title: HISTORY
content:
<i>lscgroup</i> is an integral part of the <i>libcgroup</i> project, which provides a comprehensive suite of utilities and a library for managing Linux control groups. Its development coincided with the initial integration of cgroups (cgroup v1) into the Linux kernel, offering a command-line interface to inspect and manage resource isolation features.<br><br>For many years, <i>libcgroup</i> tools, including <i>lscgroup</i>, were the primary way system administrators interacted with cgroups directly. While <i>systemd</i> has since become the dominant cgroup manager on most modern Linux distributions, abstracting much of the direct cgroup interaction, <i>lscgroup</i> remains valuable for low-level inspection and understanding the underlying cgroup hierarchy structure, especially in environments where <i>systemd</i> is not used or where a detailed view of the <i>cgroupfs</i> mounts is needed.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><i>SUBSYSTEM</i>...</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Optionally specify one or more subsystem names to limit the output to only those subsystems. For example, <b>lssubsys</b> <i>cpu memory</i> will only show the mount points for the cpu and memory subsystems.<br><br><b><b>-m</b>, <b>--mount-point</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display only the mount point of the cgroup filesystem, without the subsystem name. This is useful when you only need the path for scripting or quick reference.<br><br><b><b>-M</b> <i>PATH</i>, <b>--host-root=</b><i>PATH</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify an alternate host root directory. This is useful in container environments or when inspecting cgroups of a chrooted system, allowing <b>lssubsys</b> to operate on a different root filesystem.<br><br><b><b>-h</b>, <b>--help</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display a help message and exit.<br><br><b><b>-v</b>, <b>--version</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Output version information and exit.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <b>lssubsys</b> command is a utility for inspecting the <I>control group</I> (cgroup) filesystem on a Linux system. It provides a simple way to list all currently mounted cgroup subsystems and their respective mount points. Cgroups are a fundamental Linux kernel feature used for organizing processes into hierarchical groups to manage and account for system resources like CPU, memory, I/O, and network bandwidth. <br><br>Each cgroup subsystem is responsible for managing a specific type of resource. For example, the <I>cpu</I> subsystem controls CPU allocation, and the <I>memory</I> subsystem manages memory usage. By default, <b>lssubsys</b> will output a list of each mounted subsystem along with its path in the filesystem, typically under <I>/sys/fs/cgroup</I>. This command is invaluable for system administrators and developers who need to understand how cgroups are configured on a system, verify proper subsystem mounting, or diagnose resource management issues, especially in environments utilizing containers or resource isolation.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<b>lssubsys</b> primarily interacts with the <I>cgroup v1</I> API, where each subsystem can be mounted on its own hierarchy. In systems predominantly using <I>cgroup v2</I> (the unified hierarchy), <b>lssubsys</b> might show fewer or no explicit subsystem mount points, as v2 consolidates all resources under a single mount (typically <I>/sys/fs/cgroup</I>). It requires the cgroup filesystem to be mounted, which is usually handled automatically by the operating system (e.g., via systemd). The command is part of the <I>cgroup-tools</I> package, which may need to be installed separately depending on your Linux distribution.


title: CGROUP VERSIONS (V1 VS. V2)
content:
Linux supports two major versions of cgroups: <I>cgroup v1</I> and <I>cgroup v2</I>. <b>lssubsys</b> is primarily designed for cgroup v1, where different subsystems (e.g., cpu, memory) can be mounted on separate, distinct hierarchies in the filesystem. In contrast, cgroup v2 introduces a unified hierarchy where all subsystems are managed under a single mount point (typically <I>/sys/fs/cgroup</I>). While v1 allows for more flexibility in some setups, v2 aims for a cleaner, more consistent resource management model. When operating on a system primarily using v2, <b>lssubsys</b> might not show the individual subsystem mounts as it would for v1, making its output less informative for pure v2 contexts.


title: TYPICAL OUTPUT
content:
When run without arguments or the <b>--mount-point</b> option, <b>lssubsys</b> typically outputs two columns: the cgroup subsystem name and its corresponding mount path. <br><br><i>Example:</i><br><code>cpu,cpuacct  /sys/fs/cgroup/cpu,cpuacct<br>memory       /sys/fs/cgroup/memory<br>pids         /sys/fs/cgroup/pids<br>blkio        /sys/fs/cgroup/blkio</code><br><br>This output directly shows which resource controllers are active and where their respective control files and directories can be found for further inspection or management.


title: HISTORY
content:
The concept of <I>control groups</I> (cgroups) was initially developed by Google engineers (Paul Menage and Rohit Seth) as 'process containers' in 2006. It was renamed to cgroups in 2007 and merged into the Linux kernel mainline in version 2.6.24 in January 2008. The <b>lssubsys</b> command, along with other utilities in the <I>cgroup-tools</I> suite, emerged as essential tools for interacting with and managing these kernel features. Its importance grew significantly with the rise of containerization technologies like Docker and LXC, and the widespread adoption of systemd, all of which heavily leverage cgroups for resource isolation and management. The command has remained a stable utility for inspecting the cgroup setup, particularly for the cgroup v1 architecture.


title: SEE ALSO
content:
cgroups(7), lscgroup(1), cgcreate(1), cgdelete(1), cgexec(1), cgget(1), cgset(1), systemd.resource-control(5)


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>-s, --size <WIDTHxHEIGHT></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the output dimensions for the image in columns and rows (e.g., <code>80x24</code>).<br><br><b>-w, --width <WIDTH></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the maximum output width in terminal columns.<br><br><b>-h, --height <HEIGHT></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the maximum output height in terminal rows.<br><br><b>-a, --auto</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Automatically adjusts the image size to fit the current terminal window.<br><br><b>-f, --format <METHOD></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Selects the rendering method. Common methods include <b>auto</b>, <b>24bit</b>, <b>sixel</b>, <b>kitty</b>, <b>block</b>, <b>ascii</b>.<br><br><b>-l, --loop <N></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;For animated GIFs, specifies the number of times to loop (0 for infinite looping).<br><br><b>-d, --delay <MS></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the delay in milliseconds between frames of an animation.<br><br><b>-b, --background <COLOR></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the background color for padding or transparent areas (e.g., <code>red</code>, <code>#RRGGBB</code>).<br><br><b>--upscale</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enables upscaling of small images to fill the designated display area.<br><br><b><FILE(S)></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;One or more paths to image files (e.g., <code>image.jpg</code>, <code>my_gif.gif</code>) to be displayed.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>timg</i> (Terminal IMaGe viewer) is a versatile command-line utility designed to display images directly within your terminal emulator. It supports a wide array of image formats, including JPEG, PNG, GIF, and even some video formats by rendering frames. <i>timg</i> can utilize various display methods, adapting to your terminal's capabilities, from simple character-based ASCII art to advanced true color block characters,<br>or even direct pixel rendering via <b>sixel</b> graphics (supported by terminals like <i>mlterm</i>, <i>xterm</i> with sixel patches) and the <b>Kitty graphics protocol</b>.<br><br>It's an invaluable tool for quick image previews without launching a separate GUI application, integrating visual content into terminal-centric workflows, or scripting automated image processing tasks where visual feedback is needed. Beyond static images, <i>timg</i> also excels at displaying animated GIFs and videos by sequentially rendering their frames, offering options to control looping and frame delay.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<b>Terminal Compatibility:</b> Not all terminal emulators support every rendering method (e.g., <i>sixel</i> or <i>Kitty graphics protocol</i> are specific). The visual quality and available features highly depend on your terminal's capabilities.<br><b>Performance:</b> Displaying very large images or complex animated GIFs can be resource-intensive, potentially leading to slower rendering or higher CPU usage, especially with character-based methods.<br><b>Aspect Ratio Distortion:</b> When using character-based rendering, the image aspect ratio might appear distorted due to the non-square nature of terminal character cells. Using <code>--font-width</code> and <code>--font-height</code> can help.<br><b>Color Accuracy:</b> While <i>timg</i> supports true 24-bit color, its effective display depends on terminal support; otherwise, colors might be dithered or approximated.


title: RENDERING METHODS EXPLAINED
content:
<i>timg</i> offers various rendering methods via the <code>--format</code> option:<br><b>auto:</b> (Default) Automatically chooses the best available method for your terminal.<br><b>24bit:</b> Uses 24-bit ANSI true colors and Unicode block characters to render images with high fidelity.<br><b>sixel:</b> Renders images using the DEC sixel graphics protocol, providing near-pixel-perfect output on compatible terminals (e.g., <i>xterm</i> with sixel, <i>mlterm</i>).<br><b>kitty:</b> Utilizes the Kitty graphics protocol, offering high-resolution image display specifically for the <i>Kitty</i> terminal emulator.<br><b>block:</b> Renders using standard block characters (e.g., half-block Unicode characters) and 256-color or 24-bit ANSI colors.<br><b>ascii:</b> Converts the image into ASCII art, using character density to represent image brightness and contrast.


title: INTEGRATION WITH SCRIPTS
content:
<i>timg</i> is ideal for integration into shell scripts. For example, you can use it to preview images downloaded on the fly, display QR codes, or visualize output from other command-line tools that generate image data. Its ability to automatically resize and select the best format makes it robust for diverse scripting environments.


title: HISTORY
content:
<i>timg</i> emerged as a modern solution to address the growing demand for displaying graphical content directly within the terminal, improving upon earlier, often more specialized, ASCII art converters. Its development focuses on leveraging advancements in terminal emulators, such as true color support (24-bit ANSI escape sequences), the re-emergence of <i>sixel</i> graphics, and newer protocols like the <i>Kitty graphics protocol</i>.<br><br>While not having a long historical lineage like some core Unix utilities, <i>timg</i> represents a contemporary effort to enhance the terminal experience, integrating robust image processing capabilities (often via libraries like <i>ImageMagick</i> or <i>FreeImage</i>) with flexible terminal rendering techniques. It aims to provide a unified, powerful tool for what was previously achieved by a collection of smaller, less capable utilities.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>juju</b> [<i>GLOBAL_OPTIONS</i>] <i>&lt;command&gt;</i> [<i>COMMAND_OPTIONS</i>] [<i>ARGUMENTS</i>]<br><br>Juju is a powerful command-line interface (CLI) that acts as a client to a Juju controller. It operates primarily through a rich set of subcommands, each dedicated to managing specific aspects of application deployment and operation. <i>GLOBAL_OPTIONS</i> affect the overall client behavior, while <i>COMMAND_OPTIONS</i> and <i>ARGUMENTS</i> are specific to the chosen subcommand.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>--debug</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Output highly detailed debug information, useful for troubleshooting Juju operations.<br><br><b><b>--verbose</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Output more verbose information than default, providing additional insights into Juju's actions.<br><br><b><b>--quiet</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Suppress all non-error output, useful for scripting or when only critical messages are desired.<br><br><b><b>--version</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Show the client version information for Juju.<br><br><b><b>--help</b>, <b>-h</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display help for the main Juju command or for a specific subcommand (e.g., <code>juju help deploy</code>).<br><br><b><b>--logging-config</b> <i>&lt;path&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify a path to a custom logging configuration file to override default settings.<br><br><b><b>--no-browser</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Prevent Juju from attempting to open a web browser for authentication purposes.<br><br><b><b>--show-log-time</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Include timestamps in log output, aiding in chronological analysis of events.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
Juju is an open-source application orchestration and lifecycle management tool developed by Canonical. It allows users to rapidly deploy, integrate, and manage complex applications across various environments, including public clouds (AWS, Azure, GCP), private clouds (OpenStack), bare metal servers, and Kubernetes clusters.<br><br>At its core, Juju uses 'charms' – reusable bundles of operational knowledge – to encapsulate the best practices for installing, configuring, connecting, scaling, and maintaining software services. These charms automate day-2 operations, reducing manual effort and ensuring consistent deployments.<br><br>Users deploy charms into 'models' which are managed by a 'controller'. Juju handles the provisioning of underlying infrastructure (VMs or containers), networking, and the execution of charm-defined operations. It facilitates the creation of 'relations' between services, allowing them to discover and configure each other automatically. Juju aims to simplify the operational burden of modern distributed applications, making them easier to consume and manage for developers and operations teams alike.


title: CAVEATS
content:
Juju introduces its own set of concepts (controllers, models, charms, relations) which require a learning curve. While it aims for automation, the initial setup and understanding of charm development or selection can be complex. The availability and maintenance quality of charms for specific applications can vary. Managing the Juju controller itself, especially for high-availability, also adds an operational overhead.


title: KEY CONCEPTS
content:
<b>Controller</b>: The central management server for Juju, often deployed as a high-availability cluster.<br><b>Model</b>: A logical workspace within a controller where applications are deployed, managed, and interact.<br><b>Charm</b>: A package of operational knowledge that defines how to deploy, configure, integrate, and operate a specific application or service. Charms are written in Python.<br><b>Application</b>: An instance of a deployed charm within a model, representing a running service.<br><b>Relation</b>: A connection established between two or more applications, enabling them to communicate and share configuration dynamically.


title: INSTALLATION
content:
The Juju client is most commonly installed via Snap on Linux systems: <code>snap install juju --classic</code>. It can also be installed from various system repositories or as a standalone binary for other operating systems like macOS and Windows.


title: HISTORY
content:
Developed and maintained by Canonical, the company behind Ubuntu, Juju was initially conceived to simplify the deployment and management of applications on cloud infrastructure, particularly OpenStack, AWS, and later Azure and GCP. Its design philosophy centered on 'charms' to encapsulate operational knowledge. With the rise of containerization and Kubernetes, Juju evolved to extend its orchestration capabilities to Kubernetes clusters and bare metal, aiming to provide a consistent application operations experience across diverse computing environments. It remains an active open-source project.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><I>catalog_file</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The path to the message catalog file to create or update. This file stores messages in a binary format, used by functions like <I>catgets(3)</I>.<br><br><b><I>msg_file</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;One or more input message source files. These files contain message definitions in a specific plain-text format, including set IDs, message IDs, and the actual message strings.<br><br><b>-V</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays version information for the <b>gencat</b> utility and then exits.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<b>gencat</b> is a standard utility specified by POSIX for creating and managing message catalogs used in internationalization (i18n). It takes one or more source files, typically with a <I>.msg</I> extension, containing locale-specific messages and merges them into a binary message catalog file, often named with a <I>.cat</I> extension. If the specified <I>catalog_file</I> does not exist, <b>gencat</b> creates it. If it already exists, new messages are merged with existing ones. Messages with matching set IDs and message IDs in the input <I>msg_file</I> will replace their counterparts in the existing <I>catalog_file</I>. This process allows applications to retrieve localized messages at runtime using functions like <I>catgets(3)</I>, making software adaptable to various languages and regions without code changes. The input message files follow a specific format, defining message sets, individual messages, and optionally, a quote character.


title: CAVEATS
content:
The format of the <I>msg_file</I> is critical; incorrect syntax can lead to catalog generation errors. Messages in the <I>catalog_file</I> are stored in a binary format, meaning they are not directly human-readable or editable after generation. <b>gencat</b> is part of the POSIX internationalization framework, which is distinct from the more widely used GNU <I>gettext</I> system, though both serve similar purposes. Applications must use <I>catgets(3)</I> or similar POSIX functions to access messages from catalogs created by <b>gencat</b>.


title: MESSAGE FILE FORMAT
content:
Input message source files (<I>.msg</I> files) adhere to a specific format. Lines starting with `$` are directives or comments. <br> <ul><li>`$set <I>N</I>`: Defines the current message set ID to <I>N</I>. Subsequent messages without a set directive belong to this set.</li><li>`$delset <I>N</I>`: Deletes message set <I>N</I> from the catalog.</li><li>`$quote <I>C</I>`: Defines <I>C</I> as the quote character for message strings, overriding the default `"`.</li><li>`<I>msgid</I> <I>message_string</I>`: Defines a message with <I>msgid</I> in the current set. The <I>message_string</I> can be quoted.</li></ul>


title: HISTORY
content:
<b>gencat</b> is a core utility specified by the X/Open Portability Guide (XPG) and later incorporated into the POSIX.1-2001 and POSIX.1-2008 standards for internationalization. It was developed as part of a standardized approach to allow applications to present locale-specific messages to users, facilitating software localization across different languages and regions. Its design is intrinsically linked with the <I>catgets(3)</I> function, forming a foundational mechanism for message retrieval in internationalized applications before the widespread adoption of other systems like GNU <I>gettext</I>.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
aur-build [<I>options</I>] <I>pkgbase</I>...<br>aur-check [<I>options</I>] <I>pkgbase</I>...<br>aur-chroot [<I>options</I>] <I>command</I>...<br>aur-repo [<I>options</I>] <I>subcommand</I>...<br>aur-sync [<I>options</I>] [<I>pkgbase</I>...]


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>aur-build</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<b>Builds</b> AUR packages within a chroot environment, producing a `.pkg.tar.zst` file.<br><br><b>aur-check</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<b>Checks</b> for updates to installed AUR packages and their dependencies.<br><br><b>aur-chroot</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<b>Manages</b> and interacts with chroot build environments.<br><br><b>aur-repo</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<b>Manages</b> local Arch Linux package repositories, adding or removing built packages.<br><br><b>aur-sync</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<b>Synchronizes</b> the local repository with AUR packages, pulling updates and initiating builds.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
aurutils is a collection of tools designed to manage Arch User Repository (AUR) packages in a secure and <I>pacman-centric</I> way. Unlike many other AUR helpers, aurutils doesn't directly install packages after building them. Instead, it facilitates the creation and management of local Arch Linux package repositories. This approach treats AUR packages much like official ones: they are built, signed, and then added to a local repository, from which they can be installed and updated using standard <I>pacman</I> commands. <br><br>Key features include:<ul><li><b>Chroot builds:</b> Packages are built in isolated chroot environments to enhance security and prevent build-time conflicts with the host system.</li><li><b>Local repository management:</b> Tools to create, update, and manage your own package repositories, integrating seamlessly with <I>pacman</I>.</li><li><b>Dependency handling:</b> Automatically resolves and includes AUR dependencies, allowing for a complete build process.</li><li><b>Update checking:</b> Efficiently checks for updates to both explicitly installed AUR packages and their dependencies.</li><li><b>Package signing:</b> Supports GPG signing of built packages for added integrity verification.</li></ul>aurutils appeals to users who prefer a robust, transparent, and highly integrated workflow for managing AUR software, treating AUR as a natural extension of the official repositories via local caches.


title: CAVEATS
content:
aurutils offers a powerful and secure workflow, but comes with a steeper learning curve compared to simpler AUR helpers. Users need a good understanding of <I>pacman</I>, <I>makepkg</I>, and the concept of local repositories. Its configuration, primarily through <I>aur.conf</I>, requires manual setup for repositories and build environments. While chroot builds enhance security, users are still responsible for reviewing <I>PKGBUILD</I> files to understand what scripts will be run and what sources will be fetched. Misconfiguration can lead to unexpected behavior or repository issues.


title: CONFIGURATION VIA <I>AUR.CONF</I>
content:
aurutils relies heavily on its configuration file, typically located at `/etc/aurutils/aur.conf` or `~/.config/aurutils/aur.conf`. This file defines the paths to your local repositories, build directories, and specifies chroot environments. Proper setup of this file is crucial for aurutils to function correctly.


title: TYPICAL WORKFLOW
content:
A common workflow involves adding desired AUR packages to your <I>aur.conf</I>, then running <I>aur-sync</I> to fetch and build them. Once built and added to your local repository by `aur-repo`, packages can be installed and managed like any other official package using `sudo pacman -S package_name`, after ensuring your local repository is configured in `/etc/pacman.conf`.


title: HISTORY
content:
Developed by <I>Alad</I> (Alexander F. Rødseth), aurutils emerged as a response to the need for a more robust and secure method of managing AUR packages. Its development focused on leveraging existing Arch Linux tools like <I>pacman</I> and <I>makepkg</I>, rather than reinventing package management. The philosophy behind aurutils was to integrate AUR packages into the system in a way that closely mirrors official packages, particularly through the use of local repositories and mandatory chroot builds. This approach quickly resonated with experienced Arch Linux users seeking a more controlled and transparent AUR workflow, solidifying its place as a trusted helper for advanced users.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-d</b>, <b>--device=</b><I>DEVICE</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the video device to use (e.g., <i>/dev/video0</i>).<br><br><b><b>-a</b>, <b>--audio=</b><I>DEVICE</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the audio device for recording (e.g., <i>hw:0,0</i>).<br><br><b><b>-f</b>, <b>--format=</b><I>FORMAT</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Defines the video format (e.g., <i>YUYV</i>, <i>MJPG</i>, <i>RGB3</i>).<br><br><b><b>-r</b>, <b>--resolution=</b><I>WxH</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the video resolution (e.g., <i>640x480</i>, <i>1280x720</i>).<br><br><b><b>-c</b>, <b>--config=</b><I>FILE</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Loads a saved configuration file at startup, applying previously stored settings.<br><br><b><b>-s</b>, <b>--save=</b><I>FILE</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Saves the current application and camera configuration to a specified file.<br><br><b><b>-i</b>, <b>--image=</b><I>FILE</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Captures a single still image immediately and saves it to the specified file.<br><br><b><b>-v</b>, <b>--video=</b><I>FILE</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Starts recording video immediately to the specified file upon launch.<br><br><b><b>-t</b>, <b>--time=</b><I>SECONDS</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the duration for video capture in seconds when using the <b>--video</b> option.<br><br><b><b>-m</b>, <b>--minimized</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Starts the <b>guvcview</b> application minimized to the system tray or dock.<br><br><b><b>-o</b>, <b>--on-top</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Keeps the <b>guvcview</b> window always on top of other application windows.<br><br><b><b>-p</b>, <b>--profile=</b><I>PROFILE</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Loads a specific GUI profile, customizing the interface layout or features.<br><br><b><b>-V</b>, <b>--version</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays the version information of <b>guvcview</b> and exits.<br><br><b><b>-h</b>, <b>--help</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Shows a brief help message with available command-line options and exits.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<b>guvcview</b> is a free, open-source application designed to provide a simple GTK+ interface for capturing video and still images from UVC (USB Video Class) compatible webcams and other video devices on Linux. It stands out by offering extensive control over camera settings, often beyond what's available in other simple webcam tools. Users can adjust parameters such as brightness, contrast, exposure, white balance, gain, focus, and more, all through an intuitive graphical user interface.<br><br>It supports various video formats and resolutions, allows for video recording and still image capture, and includes features like on-screen display, visual effects, and custom profiles for saving and loading settings. <b>guvcview</b> is a valuable tool for anyone needing robust control over their webcam, from basic video calls to testing camera capabilities and fine-tuning image quality.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<b>guvcview</b> primarily targets UVC (USB Video Class) compatible devices. While it might work with some older or non-standard cameras via V4L2, full functionality and access to all controls are best assured with UVC-compliant hardware. Users might encounter limitations with certain devices regarding available resolutions, formats, or specific hardware controls if the device firmware or underlying V4L2 driver does not fully expose them. Permissions to access <i>/dev/video*</i> and <i>/dev/snd/*</i> devices are essential for its operation.


title: CONFIGURATION PROFILES
content:
<i>guvcview</i> allows users to save and load complete sets of camera settings (like brightness, contrast, resolution, and effects) as profiles. This is particularly useful for quickly switching between different usage scenarios or camera setups without manually reconfiguring each parameter.


title: VIDEO EFFECTS AND OVERLAYS
content:
Beyond basic camera controls, <i>guvcview</i> includes a variety of built-in video effects, such as mirror, invert, grayscale, and edge detection. It also supports adding text and image overlays, making it versatile for basic streaming, demonstrations, or creative use.


title: HISTORY
content:
<b>guvcview</b> was initially developed by Lucas de Stefanis, with early versions appearing around 2009-2010. Its creation addressed a need for a robust and user-friendly graphical interface to access the extensive controls offered by UVC-compliant webcams on Linux, which were often not fully exposed by simpler webcam applications or required command-line tools like <i>v4l2-ctl</i>. Over the years, it has seen continuous development, adding support for more video formats, resolutions, effects, and improving its overall stability and feature set, establishing itself as a go-to tool for advanced webcam control in the Linux ecosystem.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>-c <i>&lt;file&gt;</i>, --config <i>&lt;file&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify an alternative configuration <i>file</i> to use instead of the default <i>motion.conf</i>.<br><br><b>-b, --daemon</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Run <i>motion</i> in the background as a daemon process.<br><br><b>-n, --no-daemon</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Prevent <i>motion</i> from running as a daemon, keeping it in the foreground (opposite of -b).<br><br><b>-p <i>&lt;pidfile&gt;</i>, --pidfile <i>&lt;pidfile&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify an alternative <i>PID file</i> to store the process ID of the daemon.<br><br><b>-l <i>&lt;logfile&gt;</i>, --log-file <i>&lt;logfile&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify an alternative <i>log file</i> for <i>motion</i>'s output messages.<br><br><b>-k <i>&lt;level&gt;</i>, --log-level <i>&lt;level&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Set the <i>log level</i> (0-9). Higher numbers produce more verbose logging output.<br><br><b>-h, --help</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display a help message with command-line options and exit.<br><br><b>-v, --version</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display <i>motion</i>'s version information and exit.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>Motion</i> is a highly configurable program that monitors video input from one or more cameras, such as webcams or network cameras (IP cameras). Its primary function is to detect motion and react to it.<br><br>Upon detection, <i>Motion</i> can capture images, record video clips, or execute user-defined commands. It also features a built-in web server for live streaming and remote control, making it ideal for home surveillance, security monitoring, and general camera-based automation tasks. <i>Motion</i> runs as a daemon, allowing continuous background operation, and its extensive configuration options are primarily managed through a plain text configuration file.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<i>Motion</i> can be resource-intensive, especially with multiple high-resolution cameras or complex processing. Proper configuration is crucial for performance and desired behavior.<br><br>The web control interface might require careful security setup (e.g., authentication, firewall rules) to prevent unauthorized access. Many advanced features are configured within its <i>motion.conf</i> file rather than via command-line arguments, which can be a learning curve for new users.


title: CONFIGURATION FILE
content:
<i>Motion</i> relies heavily on its configuration file, typically <i>/etc/motion/motion.conf</i> or a user-specific file. This file controls almost all aspects of <i>Motion</i>'s behavior, including camera settings, motion detection parameters, recording options, web streaming, and event-triggered actions. Understanding and customizing this file is key to fully utilizing <i>Motion</i>'s capabilities.


title: WEB CONTROL INTERFACE
content:
<i>Motion</i> includes a basic web control interface, which can be configured within <i>motion.conf</i>. This interface allows for viewing live streams, accessing captured events, and even remotely changing some <i>Motion</i> parameters without restarting the daemon. It's a powerful tool for remote management but requires proper network and authentication setup for security.


title: HISTORY
content:
The <i>Motion</i> project began around 2002, initially developed by Kenneth Lavrsen. It quickly gained popularity as a flexible and open-source solution for motion detection and surveillance on Linux systems. Over the years, it has seen contributions from numerous developers, expanding its feature set to support various camera types, advanced motion detection algorithms, and integration with web interfaces. Its focus has remained on providing a robust, daemon-based surveillance solution primarily driven by a powerful configuration file.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>init</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Initializes a new bare Git repository for dotfiles in the default or specified path.<br><br><b>add <file></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Adds a file or directory to be tracked by the dotbare repository, making it eligible for version control.<br><br><b>link</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Creates symbolic links for all tracked dotfiles from the repository to their expected locations in the home directory.<br><br><b>unlink</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Removes symbolic links created by <i>dotbare link</i> from the home directory.<br><br><b>status</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Shows the status of dotfiles, similar to <i>git status</i>, indicating changes, untracked files, etc.<br><br><b>clean</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Removes untracked files or directories from the dotbare worktree, based on Git's rules.<br><br><b>update</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Fetches and merges changes from a remote repository, updating your local dotfiles.<br><br><b>ignore <pattern></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Adds a pattern to the <i>.git/info/exclude</i> file to prevent specific files or paths from being tracked.<br><br><b>unignore <pattern></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Removes a pattern from the ignore list, allowing previously ignored files to be tracked.<br><br><b>push</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Pushes committed changes in your local dotbare repository to a remote repository.<br><br><b>pull</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Fetches and integrates changes from a remote repository into your local dotbare repository.<br><br><b>--help</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays help information for <i>dotbare</i> or a specific subcommand, detailing its usage and options.<br><br><b>--version</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays the current version of the <i>dotbare</i> utility.<br><br><b>-f, --force</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Forces an operation to proceed, potentially overwriting existing files (e.g., when linking dotfiles).<br><br><b>-v, --verbose</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enables verbose output, providing more detailed information about the operations being performed.<br><br><b>-q, --quiet</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Suppresses output messages, useful for scripting or when minimal interaction is desired.<br><br><b>-p <path>, --path <path></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the alternative path to the bare Git repository (default: <i>~/.dotfiles</i>).<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>dotbare</i> is a command-line utility designed to simplify the management and synchronization of dotfiles (configuration files) across multiple Linux systems. It leverages a bare Git repository to track and manage these files directly from your home directory, avoiding the need for traditional cloning that can clutter your file system.<br><br>By treating dotfiles as a Git repository without a working tree, <i>dotbare</i> allows users to easily add, update, and link their configuration files, such as <i>.bashrc</i>, <i>.zshrc</i>, <i>.gitconfig</i>, and <i>.vimrc</i>. It provides a streamlined workflow for maintaining consistent environments, enabling effortless backups and restoration of personalized settings. Users can version control their entire configuration setup, push changes to a remote repository, and pull updates on new or different machines, ensuring their preferred settings are always available and up-to-date. This approach minimizes symlink issues and provides robust version control capabilities inherent to Git.


title: CAVEATS
content:
Requires a basic understanding of Git concepts for effective usage. Care must be taken with the <b>link</b> and <b>--force</b> flags to prevent accidental overwrites of existing files in the home directory. It's crucial to use <b>dotbare add</b> for new files to ensure they are tracked correctly. The command relies on Git being installed and properly configured on the system.


title: BARE REPOSITORY CONCEPT
content:
A bare Git repository, as used by <i>dotbare</i>, is a special type of repository that does not contain a working directory. Instead of checking out files into a local directory, it directly manages the repository's contents. In the context of <i>dotbare</i>, this allows Git to track files directly from your home directory, treating them as if they are part of the repository without a separate, visible <i>.git</i> folder in your home directory.


title: SYMLINKING FOR INTEGRATION
content:
<i>dotbare</i> primarily uses symbolic links (symlinks) to integrate tracked dotfiles from the bare repository into their expected locations within your home directory. This means the actual file content resides in the <i>.dotfiles</i> bare repository, and a 'pointer' or symlink is created in your home directory (e.g., <i>~/.bashrc</i> pointing to <i>~/.dotfiles/.bashrc</i>). This method ensures that all modifications are made to the version-controlled file in the bare repository, maintaining consistency and simplifying updates.


title: HISTORY
content:
<i>dotbare</i> emerged as a modern solution for dotfile management, addressing the growing need for a simple yet powerful way to synchronize configuration files using Git. Its development focuses on streamlining the bare Git repository approach, which gained popularity among power users for managing dotfiles without cluttering the home directory with a working tree. While not a legacy command, it represents an evolution in personal configuration management tools, providing a user-friendly interface over raw Git commands for this specific use case.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>rcsmerge</b> [ <I>options</I> ] <I>revision</I> <I>file</I><br><b>rcsmerge</b> [ <I>options</I> ] <I>revision1</I> <I>revision2</I> <I>file</I>


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-k</b><I>subst</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify the keyword substitution format. Valid substitutions include <I>kv</I> (default), <I>kvl</I>, <I>kvb</I>, <I>k</I>, <I>v</I>, <I>b</I>.<br><br><b><b>-L</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Lock the RCS file during the merge process. This prevents other users from modifying the RCS file concurrently.<br><br><b><b>-p</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Send the merged result to standard output rather than overwriting the working file. This is useful for previewing merges or piping the output.<br><br><b><b>-q</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Run in quiet mode. Suppress diagnostic messages and error reports that would normally be printed.<br><br><b><b>-r</b><I>revision</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Use the specified <I>revision</I> as the common ancestor for the merge. This is crucial for controlling the base point of the three-way merge.<br><br><b><b>-T</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Preserve the modification time of the RCS file. This can be important for build systems that rely on timestamps.<br><br><b><b>-V</b><I>n</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Emulate RCS version <I>n</I> for compatibility reasons. This can be useful when working with older RCS files or systems.<br><br><b><b>-x</b><I>suffixes</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify a comma-separated list of suffixes to recognize as RCS files. For example, <I>.c,v</I> or <I>.h,v</I>.<br><br><b><b>-z</b><I>zone</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify the time zone for timestamps. This affects how revision timestamps are interpreted and displayed.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<I>rcsmerge</I> performs a three-way merge operation, combining changes from one or two RCS revisions into a working file. It is primarily used to integrate changes from a specific RCS revision (or a pair of revisions) into a local working copy. Typically, this involves comparing the current working file against a common ancestor and a target revision from an RCS file. When merging two revisions from an RCS file, <I>rcsmerge</I> computes the differences between the two specified revisions and applies those differences to the working file.<br><br>The command outputs the merged result to standard output by default, but can also directly overwrite the working file. If conflicts occur during the merge, <I>rcsmerge</I> inserts standard conflict markers (e.g., &lt;&lt;&lt;&lt;&lt;&lt;&lt;, =======, &gt;&gt;&gt;&gt;&gt;&gt;&gt;) into the output, indicating sections that require manual resolution. This utility is fundamental for managing parallel development and integrating divergent changes within the RCS version control system.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<ul><li><I>rcsmerge</I> handles conflicts by inserting standard conflict markers into the output, requiring manual resolution by the user.</li><li>It is a low-level utility within the RCS system, which itself has largely been superseded by more modern and feature-rich version control systems like Git or Subversion.</li><li>It primarily operates on text files; merging binary files is not effectively supported and can lead to corrupt results.</li><li>Requires the corresponding RCS file (e.g., <I>file</I>,v) to be present and accessible for the merge operation to succeed.</li></ul>


title: EXIT STATUS
content:
The <I>rcsmerge</I> command exits with a status of 0 if the merge was successful and no conflicts were detected. It exits with 1 if conflicts were detected and marked in the output, indicating that manual resolution is required. A status greater than 1 typically indicates an error during execution.


title: HISTORY
content:
<I>rcsmerge</I> is an integral part of the original Revision Control System (RCS), developed by Walter F. Tichy at Purdue University in the early 1980s. RCS was one of the earliest widely adopted version control systems, primarily focusing on managing individual files. <I>rcsmerge</I> emerged as a necessary component to resolve concurrent changes and integrate divergent branches, a fundamental requirement for collaborative software development.<br><br>While newer, more distributed, and feature-rich version control systems like Git and Subversion have largely replaced RCS for project-wide management, <I>rcsmerge</I> remains relevant in environments still utilizing RCS or when needing a robust, low-level three-way merge utility. Its underlying merge logic, often leveraging <I>diff3</I>, influenced subsequent merge tools.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><i>-q</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Suppress warning messages.<br><br><b><i>-V</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Print the version number of the <b>ident</b> command.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>ident</i> is a utility from the RCS (Revision Control System) package designed to locate and print identification keywords embedded within files. These keywords, such as <i>$Id$</i>, <i>$Log$</i>, <i>$Revision$</i>, <i>$Author$</i>, and <i>$Date$</i>, are typically expanded by RCS when a file is checked out (e.g., using the <b>co</b> command). The <i>ident</i> command scans specified files (or standard input) for occurrences of these special strings. Upon finding a keyword, it prints the filename followed by the expanded keyword string. This feature is particularly useful for quickly determining the version, author, and modification date of a source file, even after it has been compiled into a binary, provided the keywords were included and expanded in the source.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<i>ident</i> only works effectively if the target files contain RCS identification keywords, and these keywords have been properly expanded by RCS during a checkout operation (e.g., using <b>co</b>). If keywords are not present or not expanded, <i>ident</i> will not find any information. While it can scan binary files, the interpretation of embedded keywords in non-textual data might sometimes be less straightforward or only possible if they exist as contiguous text strings.


title: <B>KEYWORD EXPANSION</B>
content:
RCS keywords like <i>$Id$</i> are special strings that, when processed by commands like <b>co</b> (checkout), are automatically expanded to include specific revision control information. For example, <i>$Id: filename,v 1.2 2023/10/27 10:00:00 author Exp $</i>. <i>ident</i> then reads these expanded strings.


title: <B>USAGE WITH BINARIES</B>
content:
A powerful use case for <i>ident</i> is to scan compiled binary executables or libraries. If the source files contained RCS keywords and those keywords were expanded into the source code before compilation, the resulting binary might still contain these strings. This allows <i>ident</i> to report the version of the source code used to create the binary, without needing the original source or build information.


title: HISTORY
content:
The <i>ident</i> command has been a fundamental part of the Revision Control System (RCS) since its inception in the early 1980s by Walter F. Tichy. RCS was one of the earliest widely adopted version control systems, predating more modern systems like CVS, SVN, and Git. <i>ident</i> embodies a core principle of RCS: embedding version metadata directly into the files themselves, allowing for decentralized identification of file versions without needing access to the RCS repository. Its design reflects the computing environment of its time, emphasizing simplicity and direct file manipulation for version tracking.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>lightdm</b> [<i>OPTIONS</i>]<br><i>Note:</i> <b>lightdm</b> is typically started by the system's init system (e.g., systemd) as a daemon, rather than being invoked manually by users with command-line options for daily operation. The options below are primarily for debugging or specifying alternative configuration.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-h</b>, <b>--help</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays a help message and exits.<br><br><b><b>-c</b> <I>FILE</I>, <b>--config</b>=<I>FILE</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies an alternative configuration file to use instead of the default.<br><br><b><b>-s</b> <I>FILE</I>, <b>--session-config</b>=<I>FILE</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies an alternative session configuration file.<br><br><b><b>-l</b> <I>FILE</I>, <b>--log-file</b>=<I>FILE</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Directs logging output to the specified file.<br><br><b><b>-r</b> <I>DIR</I>, <b>--run-dir</b>=<I>DIR</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the directory where LightDM stores runtime files like sockets and PIDs.<br><br><b><b>-D</b>, <b>--debug</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enables verbose debugging output, useful for troubleshooting.<br><br><b><b>--test-mode</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Runs LightDM in a test mode, often used for development or configuration validation without affecting the main system.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>lightdm</i> is a versatile and lightweight <br><b>display manager</b> for Linux and other Unix-like operating systems. It provides a graphical login interface, allowing users to select their desired session and securely log in to their desktop environment. Developed with performance and cross-desktop compatibility in mind, it is often favored for environments like XFCE, LXDE, and MATE. Unlike heavier display managers, <i>lightdm</i> focuses on a modular design, separating the core display management logic from the user-facing login screen, known as the "greeter." This architecture allows for various greeters (e.g., GTK+, Qt-based) to be plugged in, offering extensive customization options for the visual appearance and functionality of the login screen. It effectively handles X server management, session startup, and user authentication, ensuring a smooth transition from boot to desktop.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<i>lightdm</i> is usually managed by the system's init system (like systemd) and not intended for direct manual execution by users for daily use. <br>Its primary configuration is done through files in <tt>/etc/lightdm/</tt>, especially <tt>lightdm.conf</tt>. <br>A functional greeter (e.g., <tt>lightdm-gtk-greeter</tt>) must be installed and configured for the graphical login screen to appear.


title: CONFIGURATION FILES
content:
The core behavior and appearance of <i>lightdm</i> are extensively customized via configuration files, primarily <tt>/etc/lightdm/lightdm.conf</tt> and files within <tt>/etc/lightdm/lightdm.conf.d/</tt>. These files control greeter settings, session default, user lists, autologin, and more.


title: GREETERS
content:
<i>lightdm</i> employs a modular design where the actual graphical login screen is provided by a separate component called a "greeter." Common greeters include <tt>lightdm-gtk-greeter</tt> (GTK+ based) and <tt>lightdm-kde-greeter</tt> (Qt based), which can be installed and configured independently to match the desktop environment's aesthetic.


title: HISTORY
content:
<i>lightdm</i> was initially developed by Canonical Ltd. for Ubuntu, making its debut in Ubuntu 11.10 "Oneiric Ocelot" in October 2011. It was designed to be a faster, more lightweight, and highly customizable alternative to the then-default GNOME Display Manager (GDM). Although Ubuntu has since transitioned back to GDM for better integration with GNOME Shell, <i>lightdm</i> remains a popular choice for other distributions and desktop environments, particularly those focused on performance and customizability like XFCE, LXDE, and MATE.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>-v</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enable verbose mode. Prints the filename before displaying comments for each processed file.<br><br><b>-s</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Suppress warnings about non-standard JPEG markers encountered in the input file(s).<br><br><b>-t</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Truncate the output comment at the first newline character, useful for extracting single-line comments.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<b>rdjpgcom</b> is a utility included in the libjpeg project, designed to extract and display text comments embedded within JPEG image files. JPEG files can contain arbitrary text strings in special "comment" markers (JFIF COM markers). These comments are often used to store metadata, copyright notices, descriptions, or any other user-defined text information directly within the image file. The command reads the specified JPEG file(s) and prints all found comments to standard output. If no filename is provided, it reads from standard input, allowing it to be used in pipelines. It's a straightforward tool for quickly inspecting the textual metadata of JPEG images without needing to open them in an image editor.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<b>rdjpgcom</b> specifically targets JFIF COM (comment) markers. It will not extract other types of metadata, such as EXIF data or XMP metadata. For those, other tools like <I>exiftool</I> or <I>jpegtran</I> (for EXIF only) would be necessary. Also, the command treats comments as plain text; it does not interpret or display them in any formatted way.


title: BASIC USAGE
content:
To display comments from a single JPEG file:<br><code>rdjpgcom image.jpg</code><br><br>To display comments from multiple JPEG files:<br><code>rdjpgcom image1.jpg image2.jpg</code>


title: READING FROM STANDARD INPUT
content:
You can pipe image data to <b>rdjpgcom</b>. For example, to read comments from an image whose data is generated by another command:<br><code>cat image.jpg | rdjpgcom</code>


title: VERBOSE OUTPUT
content:
To see the filename before its comments, especially useful when processing multiple files:<br><code>rdjpgcom -v image.jpg another.jpeg</code>


title: HISTORY
content:
<b>rdjpgcom</b> is an integral part of the <I>libjpeg</I> project, which originated in the early 1990s as a free and open-source implementation of the JPEG standard. Its primary goal was to provide a widely available and efficient library for JPEG compression and decompression. As part of this suite, <b>rdjpgcom</b> and its counterpart <b>wrjpgcom</b> were developed to handle the simple text comment feature of the JPEG format, allowing users to embed or extract basic textual metadata directly within the image stream. Its usage remains consistent with the core philosophy of <I>libjpeg</I>: providing fundamental tools for JPEG file manipulation.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-h</b>, <b>--help</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display a concise help message and exit.<br><br><b><b>-V</b>, <b>--version</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Print the ClamAV version number and exit.<br><br><b><b>-n</b>, <b>--no-summary</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Suppress printing the ClamAV build information summary at the beginning of the output. This focuses the output solely on configuration details.<br><br><b><b>-g</b>, <b>--gen-hostid</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Generate a new unique host ID and print it to standard output. This operation does not persist the ID to any configuration file.<br><br><b><b>-l</b>, <b>--list-configs</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;List all discovered configuration files and their types (e.g., <I>clamd.conf</I>, <I>freshclam.conf</I>), along with their paths, without parsing their content.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<b>clamconf</b> is a utility included with the ClamAV antivirus engine. Its primary purpose is to display the current ClamAV configuration information, including details about the build, various configuration files (e.g., <I>clamd.conf</I>, <I>freshclam.conf</I>) it discovers, and their parsed contents.<br><br>This tool is invaluable for troubleshooting ClamAV installations, verifying daemon settings, and debugging issues related to incorrect configurations. It can also generate a host ID for unique system identification, though it doesn't save it by default. The output can be comprehensive, making it easy to see all active settings at a glance, which is particularly useful in environments where multiple configuration files might exist or settings are inherited from different locations.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<b>clamconf</b> reports on the configuration files it <I>finds</I> in standard locations. If configuration files are located in non-standard paths, <b>clamconf</b> might not include them in its output unless symlinked or explicitly configured in its own search paths (which is rare for <b>clamconf</b> itself).<br><br>The <b>--gen-hostid</b> option only <I>generates</I> and <I>prints</I> a host ID; it does not automatically save it to any configuration file. This usually needs to be done manually by editing <I>clamd.conf</I> if required.


title: CONFIGURATION FILE SEARCH ORDER
content:
<b>clamconf</b> typically searches for configuration files (<I>clamd.conf</I>, <I>freshclam.conf</I>, etc.) in a predefined set of directories, often including <I>/etc/clamav/</I>, <I>/usr/local/etc/clamav/</I>, and sometimes paths relative to the ClamAV installation. The exact order and locations can vary slightly depending on the system and how ClamAV was installed.


title: OUTPUT STRUCTURE
content:
The output of <b>clamconf</b> usually starts with a build summary (unless <b>-n</b> is used), followed by sections for each discovered configuration file. Each section lists the file path and then key-value pairs of the configuration directives parsed from that file. This structured output is designed to be easily readable for quick diagnosis of ClamAV settings.


title: HISTORY
content:
<b>clamconf</b> has been a part of the ClamAV suite for a considerable time, evolving alongside the core antivirus engine. Its primary function has remained consistent: to provide an insight into the running or default configurations of ClamAV components, simplifying the debugging and auditing process for administrators. Its development reflects the increasing complexity of ClamAV deployments and the need for clear diagnostic tools.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>amarok</b> [<i>OPTIONS</i>] [<i>FILES/URLs...</i>]<br>Control a running instance: <b>amarok</b> [<i>--play</i> | <i>--pause</i> | <i>--stop</i> | <i>--next</i> | <i>--previous</i> | <i>--status</i> | <i>--enqueue <file_or_url></i> | <i>...other_control_options...</i>]


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><i>--help</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays a help message with available command-line options.<br><br><b><i>--version</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Shows the Amarok version information.<br><br><b><i>--play</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Starts or resumes playback of the current playlist.<br><br><b><i>--pause</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Pauses the current track.<br><br><b><i>--stop</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Stops playback.<br><br><b><i>--next</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Plays the next track in the playlist.<br><br><b><i>--previous</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Plays the previous track in the playlist.<br><br><b><i>--status</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Prints the current playback status (e.g., track title, artist, time).<br><br><b><i>--volume-up</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Increases the playback volume.<br><br><b><i>--volume-down</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Decreases the playback volume.<br><br><b><i>--set-volume <level></i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the volume to a specific <i>level</i> (0-100).<br><br><b><i>--enqueue <file_or_url></i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Adds a specified <i>file_or_url</i> to the end of the current playlist.<br><br><b><i>--play-media <file_or_url></i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Starts playing the specified <i>file_or_url</i> immediately, clearing the current playlist.<br><br><b><i>--clear-playlist</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Clears the entire current playlist.<br><br><b><i>--toggle-playlist</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Toggles the visibility of the playlist window.<br><br><b><i>--toggle-shuffle</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Toggles shuffle playback mode on or off.<br><br><b><i>--toggle-repeat</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Toggles repeat playback mode (track, playlist, or off).<br><br><b><i>--seek <seconds></i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Seeks to a specific absolute <i>seconds</i> position in the current track.<br><br><b><i>--seek-relative <seconds></i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Seeks <i>seconds</i> relative to the current position (positive for forward, negative for backward).<br><br><b><i>--playlist <file_or_url></i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Loads a playlist from the specified <i>file_or_url</i>.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<b>Amarok</b> is a free and open-source music player designed primarily for Unix-like operating systems, with a strong emphasis on integration within the KDE desktop environment. Launched in 2003, it quickly became renowned for its powerful music management capabilities, offering a comprehensive suite of features beyond simple playback. Users can organize vast music collections, create dynamic playlists, fetch lyrics and album art, manage podcasts, and even integrate with various online music services. While it presents a full-featured graphical user interface, Amarok also provides a command-line interface for remote control. This allows users to interact with a running Amarok instance without directly opening or switching to its GUI. Common command-line uses include initiating playback, pausing, skipping tracks, querying the current status, adjusting volume, or enqueuing specific audio files or URLs. Its design prioritizes an intuitive user experience and robust handling of large music libraries.


title: CAVEATS
content:
The development of <b>Amarok</b> has significantly slowed down in recent years, making some of its online features and integrations potentially outdated or non-functional. It is fundamentally a graphical application; its command-line options are primarily for remote control of a running GUI instance, rather than functioning as a standalone command-line media player. Users on non-KDE desktop environments might find it pulls in a large number of KDE dependencies.


title: REMOTE CONTROL PARADIGM
content:
The <b>amarok</b> command-line interface operates primarily as a remote control for a running graphical instance. This means that to utilize options like <i>--play</i> or <i>--enqueue</i>, the Amarok GUI application typically needs to be already running in the background. It is not designed to be invoked as a standalone command-line audio player without the GUI component.


title: KDE DEEP INTEGRATION
content:
As a native KDE application, <b>Amarok</b> leverages KDE libraries and services extensively. This ensures deep integration within the KDE desktop environment, providing a seamless user experience. However, this also implies that users on other desktop environments (like GNOME or XFCE) will likely need to install a substantial set of KDE dependencies for Amarok to function correctly.


title: HISTORY
content:
First released in 2003, <b>Amarok</b> quickly rose to prominence as a leading music player for the KDE desktop environment. Its 1.x series was particularly celebrated for its innovative features and user-friendly interface. However, a major rewrite and user interface redesign introduced with version 2.x, aimed at modernizing the codebase, proved controversial among some long-time users and led to the creation of the <b>Clementine</b> fork. While it continued development for a period, contributions and major releases have become less frequent over the last decade, reflecting a general decline in its active maintenance compared to its peak popularity.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-r</b><i>SID</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies an SCCS ID (SID) for the target version, passed to subcommands like <b>get</b> or <b>delta</b>.<br><br><b><b>-c</b><i>cutoff</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Defines a cutoff date and time (e.g., <i>YYMMDDHHMMSS</i>), typically used by <b>get</b> or <b>prs</b> to filter revisions.<br><br><b><b>-i</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Shorthand for invoking <b>admin -i</b>, used to create a new SCCS file from an existing plain file.<br><br><b><b>-e</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Shorthand for invoking <b>get -e</b>, used to retrieve a specific version of a file for editing.<br><br><b><b>-d</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Shorthand for invoking <b>delta</b>, used to commit changes and create a new SCCS delta.<br><br><b><b>-q</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Suppresses all command output, useful for scripting where only the exit status matters.<br><br><b><b>-s</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Suppresses the printing of the SCCS Identification String (SID) to standard output.<br><br><b><i>subcommand</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The specific SCCS utility to execute (e.g., <b>get</b>, <b>delta</b>, <b>admin</b>, <b>prs</b>).<br><br><b><i>subcommand_options</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Options specific to the chosen SCCS subcommand.<br><br><b><i>file ...</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;One or more source files (or SCCS files prefixed with <i>s.</i>) to operate on.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<b>SCCS</b> (Source Code Control System) is one of the earliest version control systems, originating from Bell Labs in the early 1970s. It was designed to manage changes to source code files and other text documents. The <b>sccs</b> command itself acts as a convenient front-end, simplifying interaction with the underlying SCCS utilities like <b>get</b>, <b>delta</b>, <b>admin</b>, <b>prs</b>, and others. It allows users to retrieve specific versions, make changes, commit new versions, and manage the SCCS file attributes.<br><br>Unlike modern systems that often store full copies or diffs, SCCS uses a unique delta-based storage mechanism where it stores the original version and then deltas (changes) for subsequent versions. While largely superseded by systems like RCS, CVS, Subversion, and Git due to its perceived complexity and lack of distributed capabilities, <b>SCCS</b> remains historically significant and can still be found on some legacy Unix systems. It's particularly noted for its robust handling of file revisions and its influence on later version control designs.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<b>SCCS</b> is largely considered obsolete for modern development, having been superseded by more advanced and user-friendly systems. It is a centralized, local-file-based system, lacking network or distributed capabilities. Its command-line interface can be arcane, and it requires specific file naming conventions (e.g., <i>s.filename</i>), presenting a steeper learning curve for users accustomed to modern version control systems.


title: SCCS FILE STRUCTURE
content:
<b>SCCS</b> files are not plain text files; they are binary files prefixed with <i>s.</i> (e.g., <i>s.main.c</i>). They contain the original file content and a series of deltas, along with metadata, making them directly unreadable and uneditable by standard text editors. Users interact with them exclusively through <b>sccs</b> commands.


title: DELTA-BASED STORAGE
content:
<b>SCCS</b> stores changes as deltas. The first version (initial delta) is stored completely, and subsequent versions are stored as instructions to transform one version into another. This differs significantly from many modern version control systems that store full snapshots or use reverse deltas.


title: HISTORY
content:
<b>SCCS</b> was developed by Marc Rochkind at Bell Labs starting in 1972. It was one of the first widely used version control systems, predating RCS. Its core innovation was the delta-based storage mechanism, which efficiently stored only the changes between versions rather than full copies, making it suitable for disk-space-constrained systems of its era. <b>SCCS</b> influenced the design of subsequent version control systems and became a standard part of many Unix distributions, including System V and BSD. While its direct use diminished with the rise of RCS and later networked VCS like CVS and Subversion, and eventually distributed VCS like Git, its principles of revision tracking and delta storage were foundational to the evolution of software configuration management.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<code>bmptopbm [<I>options</I>] [<I>filename</I>]</code><br><code>bmptopbm [<I>options</I>] &lt; <I>input.bmp</I> &gt; <I>output.pbm_or_pgm</I></code>


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><code>-2</code></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Forces the output PGM file (when input is color/grayscale) to have a maxval of 3, implying 2 bits per pixel.<br><br><b><code>-4</code></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Forces the output PGM file (when input is color/grayscale) to have a maxval of 15, implying 4 bits per pixel.<br><br><b><code>-8</code></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Forces the output PGM file (when input is color/grayscale) to have a maxval of 255, implying 8 bits per pixel (this is the default).<br><br><b><code>-alphacolor <I>color</I></code></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies a color (e.g., <code>red</code>, <code>blue</code>, <code>#RRGGBB</code>) to be used for transparent pixels if no alpha output file is specified with <code>-alphaout</code>.<br><br><b><code>-alphaout={alpha-filename|DISCARD}</code></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Extracts the alpha channel from the BMP to a separate PGM file named <code>alpha-filename</code>. If <code>DISCARD</code> is specified, the alpha channel is ignored.<br><br><b><code>-imagetype={type}</code></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Forces <code>bmptopbm</code> to interpret the BMP file as a specific type, which can be useful for malformed or ambiguous BMPs. Supported types depend on the Netpbm version.<br><br><b><code>-mapfile=<I>map-filename</I></code></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Uses the colors in the specified <code>map-filename</code> (a Netpbm image file) to quantize the input image's colors.<br><br><b><code>-truecolor</code></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Forces <code>bmptopbm</code> to interpret 16-bit and 32-bit BMP files as truecolor images, even if they appear to be palette-based.<br><br><b><code>-verbose</code></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Prints informative messages about the conversion process to standard error.<br><br><b><code>--help</code></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays a brief help message and exits.<br><br><b><code>--version</code></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays the version information of the Netpbm package and exits.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<code>bmptopbm</code> is a utility from the Netpbm package designed to convert Microsoft Windows bitmap (BMP) files into Netpbm formats. Despite its name, which implies output only to Portable Bitmap (PBM) format, <code>bmptopbm</code> intelligently produces either a PBM or a Portable Graymap (PGM) file depending on the input BMP's content.<br><br>If the input BMP file is black and white, the command generates a PBM file, which represents a binary image. However, if the BMP contains color or grayscale data, <code>bmptopbm</code> converts it into a PGM file. This conversion typically involves transforming color or grayscale information into a grayscale representation, often with a default maximum pixel value of 255.<br><br>The command supports various BMP formats, including uncompressed and run-length encoded types, as well as different bit depths (1, 4, 8, 16, 24, 32-bit). It can read BMP data from standard input if no filename is specified, and by default, writes the resulting PBM or PGM image to standard output. Options allow for fine-tuning the conversion, such as handling alpha channels, forcing specific output bit depths for PGM, and verbose reporting.


title: CAVEATS
content:
The command's name, <code>bmptopbm</code>, can be misleading. While it always handles BMP input, it produces a Portable Graymap (PGM) file when the input BMP contains color or grayscale information, and only produces a Portable Bitmap (PBM) file if the input is strictly black and white. It cannot handle very old OS/2 Presentation Manager 1.x BMP formats.


title: OUTPUT FORMAT DETERMINATION
content:
<code>bmptopbm</code> automatically determines the output Netpbm format. It produces a <code>PBM</code> file for purely black and white BMPs and a <code>PGM</code> file for color or grayscale BMPs. The output maxval for PGM files is 255 by default but can be changed using the <code>-2</code>, <code>-4</code>, or <code>-8</code> options.


title: STANDARD INPUT/OUTPUT
content:
If no input <code>filename</code> is provided, <code>bmptopbm</code> reads the BMP data from standard input. The converted image output is written to standard output unless redirected to a file. This allows for piping operations within shell scripts.


title: HISTORY
content:
<code>bmptopbm</code> is an integral part of the Netpbm project, a toolkit for manipulating graphic images that originated in the early 1990s. As a foundational converter within the suite, its development has evolved with the Netpbm standard, ensuring compatibility with various BMP formats and contributing to the suite's robust image conversion capabilities.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-u</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Unlock a file if it is locked by the calling user and its contents match the latest revision in the RCS file, and then delete the working file. Without this option, <i><b>rcsclean</b></i> will not remove locked files.<br><br><b><b>-n</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Perform a 'dry run'. This option makes <i><b>rcsclean</b></i> report what it <b>would</b> do (i.e., which files it would delete) without actually performing any deletions. Useful for previewing changes.<br><br><b><b>-k<i>subst_style</i></b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Set the keyword substitution style for text files. This works similarly to the <b>-k</b> option in <i><b>co</b></i> (checkout), affecting how keywords like '$Date$' are expanded during comparison.<br><br><b><b>-q</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Operate in quiet mode. Suppress the printing of diagnostic messages, such as those indicating which files are being deleted.<br><br><b><b>-r<i>revision</i></b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify the revision to compare working files against. Only files identical to this specific revision (and not locked) will be cleaned. If omitted, the default is the latest revision on the default branch.<br><br><b><b>-T</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Preserve the modification time of the RCS file. Normally, checking in a new revision or performing other operations updates the timestamp of the RCS file. This option prevents that.<br><br><b><b>-V<i>version</i></b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display the version number of the RCS system and exit.<br><br><b><b>-x<i>suffixes</i></b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify the suffixes for RCS files. For example, <b>-x,.v</b> would look for RCS files ending in <i>.v</i>. The default is <i>,v</i>.<br><br><b><b>-z<i>zone</i></b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify the time zone to use when comparing dates. This is useful when working across different time zones to ensure consistent date comparisons.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i><b>rcsclean</b></i> is a utility from the Revision Control System (RCS) suite designed to remove working files that are no longer necessary in a directory. It compares the working files with their corresponding RCS files (typically named <i>file</i>,v) and deletes them under specific conditions.<br><br>The primary purpose of <i><b>rcsclean</b></i> is to help maintain a tidy working directory by removing files that have either been successfully checked in (and thus their changes are safely stored in the RCS repository) or are identical to the latest revision in the repository and not currently locked for editing. It intelligently avoids deleting files that are currently locked by the user or have local modifications that haven't been checked in yet, unless explicitly told to do so with certain options.<br><br>This command is particularly useful in environments where many files are managed by RCS, allowing developers to quickly clean up their workspace after a series of check-ins, reducing clutter without losing valuable work.


title: CAVEATS
content:
Using <i><b>rcsclean</b></i> with the <b>-u</b> option can lead to data loss if not used carefully, as it will unlock and delete files even if they contain local modifications that are identical to the latest revision in the repository. Always use <b>-n</b> first to preview actions, especially in unfamiliar directories. <i><b>rcsclean</b></i> only removes working files; it does not remove empty directories after files have been cleaned.


title: WORKING DIRECTORY AND RCS FILES
content:
<i><b>rcsclean</b></i> operates by looking for a corresponding RCS file (e.g., <i>file</i>,v for a working file named <i>file</i>) in the current directory or in an <i>RCS</i> subdirectory. It then compares the working file's content and lock status with the information in the RCS file to decide whether to remove it.


title: CONDITIONS FOR DELETION
content:
A working file is deleted by <i><b>rcsclean</b></i> if:<br>1. It is not locked by any user (unless <b>-u</b> is specified and locked by the invoking user).<br>2. Its content is identical to the latest revision in the RCS file (or the revision specified by <b>-r</b>).


title: HISTORY
content:
<i><b>rcsclean</b></i> is an integral part of the original Revision Control System (RCS), which was developed by Walter F. Tichy and first released in 1982. RCS was one of the earliest widely adopted version control systems, primarily designed for managing individual files rather than entire projects. <i><b>rcsclean</b></i>'s functionality has remained largely consistent since its inception, reflecting its core purpose of local working file management within the RCS paradigm. While newer, more distributed version control systems like Git have become prevalent, RCS and its utilities like <i><b>rcsclean</b></i> are still found in legacy systems and in environments where simple, file-based version control is sufficient.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><I>HOST</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The remote host to connect to via SSH. If omitted, connects to localhost if `PATH` is not provided.<br><br><b><I>PATH</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;A local Cockpit component (e.g., an HTML file) to launch directly, bypassing the full web service.<br><br><b><b>--help</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display a help message and exit.<br><br><b><b>--version</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Show the program's version number and exit.<br><br><b><b>--port</b> <I>PORT</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Connect to the Cockpit web service on the specified port, typically 9090.<br><br><b><b>--user</b> <I>USER</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Connect to the remote host as the specified user, overriding the current user.<br><br><b><b>--local-ssh</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Force the client to connect to the local machine using SSH, even if it's localhost.<br><br><b><b>--shell</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Launch an interactive shell instead of the web interface after connecting to the host.<br><br><b><b>--debug</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enable debug logging, showing more detailed information about the client's operations.<br><br><b><b>--no-desktop</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Do not attempt to open a desktop web browser, even if a graphical environment is detected.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <b>cockpit</b> command is an interactive client for the Cockpit web service, a modern, web-based graphical interface for Linux servers. It allows users to manage and monitor their systems through a web browser, providing a user-friendly way to view logs, manage services, configure networking, storage, virtual machines, and containers. While daily system management occurs primarily in the browser, the <b>cockpit</b> command-line utility itself is used to establish SSH connections to remote Cockpit instances, launch local components, or perform specific administrative and debugging tasks. It's designed to be lightweight, integrate directly with existing system APIs and tools, and offer a simple, transparent way to interact with your server.


title: CAVEATS
content:
The <b>cockpit</b> command-line utility primarily functions as a client for establishing connections to the Cockpit web service. Most server management is performed through the web browser interface. The Cockpit web service (<i>cockpit-ws</i>) must be running and accessible on the target host, typically listening on port 9090, and remote connections rely on SSH for security and authentication.


title: ARCHITECTURE AND OPERATION
content:
Cockpit consists of a small web server (<i>cockpit-ws</i>) that listens for connections, and a <i>cockpit-bridge</i> process that communicates with the underlying operating system. Instead of duplicating existing tools, Cockpit directly calls system tools and APIs, such as <i>systemctl</i> for services, <i>journalctl</i> for logs, and various D-Bus APIs. This design ensures that Cockpit always reflects the real state of the system and that changes made via Cockpit are consistent with those made via the command line.


title: DEFAULT PORT AND ACCESS
content:
By default, the Cockpit web service listens on TCP port 9090. It typically uses HTTPS for encrypted communication. Access is authenticated using system user credentials, allowing users to log in with the same username and password they would use for SSH or local console access. It integrates with PAM, meaning existing system policies for password strength and multi-factor authentication apply.


title: HISTORY
content:
Developed by Red Hat and first released around 2014, Cockpit was created to provide a modern, user-friendly, and lightweight web interface for managing Linux servers. Its design philosophy emphasizes direct integration with existing system tools and APIs rather than reimplementing functionality, ensuring transparency and reliability. Cockpit quickly gained adoption across various major Linux distributions, becoming a standard component in Fedora, CentOS, RHEL, and Ubuntu servers.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-rgb</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Outputs the color in <i>rgb:RR/GG/BB</i> format instead of the default <i>#RRGGBB</i> hexadecimal format.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<b>xcolor</b> is a minimalist command-line utility for X Window System environments. It allows users to visually select a color from any pixel on their screen. Upon execution, the cursor transforms into a crosshair. Clicking with the mouse on any part of the screen captures the color value of that pixel. The color is then output to standard output in an RGB hexadecimal format (e.g., <i>#RRGGBB</i>), making it convenient for scripting or direct use in other applications that require color input. It's particularly useful for web developers, graphic designers, or anyone needing to sample colors from their desktop.


title: CAVEATS
content:
Requires an active X display server to function; it is a GUI-dependent tool.<br>Provides minimal functionality, focusing solely on picking a single pixel color without advanced features.


title: DEFAULT OUTPUT FORMAT
content:
By default, <b>xcolor</b> outputs the picked color in the common <i>#RRGGBB</i> hexadecimal format. This is widely compatible with HTML, CSS, and many graphics applications.


title: INTEGRATION WITH OTHER TOOLS
content:
The output of <b>xcolor</b> can be easily piped to other command-line utilities. For instance, to copy the picked color to the clipboard, one might use:<br><b>xcolor</b> | <b>xclip -selection clipboard</b>


title: HISTORY
content:
<b>xcolor</b> is a long-standing utility within the X Window System's suite of basic client applications. Its simple and singular purpose reflects the original philosophy of X tools: small, focused utilities that do one thing well. It has been a consistent component of X client packages for decades, with its core functionality remaining unchanged since its early development.


title: SEE ALSO
content:
<b>xclip(1)</b> <i>(copy/paste to clipboard)</i>, <b>gpick(1)</b> <i>(more advanced GUI color picker)</i>, <b>xrandr(1)</b> <i>(X screen utilities)</i>, <b>xwininfo(1)</b> <i>(X window information)</i>


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-alpha</b> <i>&lt;type&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Control the alpha channel (e.g., <i>on</i>, <i>off</i>, <i>set</i>, <i>extract</i>) for transparency management.<br><br><b><b>-blend</b> <i>&lt;factor&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify the blending percentage (0-100) of the foreground image onto the background.<br><br><b><b>-channel</b> <i>&lt;channel-type&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Apply the composite operation to specific color channels (e.g., <i>RGBA</i>, <i>Red</i>, <i>Blue</i>).<br><br><b><b>-compose</b> <i>&lt;operator&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Set the composition operator (e.g., <i>Over</i>, <i>Dissolve</i>, <i>Multiply</i>, <i>Screen</i>, <i>HardLight</i>) to define how pixels are combined.<br><br><b><b>-dissolve</b> <i>&lt;factor&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Dissolve the foreground image into the background by a specified percentage (0-100).<br><br><b><b>-geometry</b> <i>&lt;geometry&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Define the position (e.g., <i>+X+Y</i>) and optional resizing (e.g., <i>WxH</i>) of the foreground image.<br><br><b><b>-gravity</b> <i>&lt;direction&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Set the placement reference point for the foreground image (e.g., <i>NorthWest</i>, <i>Center</i>, <i>SouthEast</i>).<br><br><b><b>-mask</b> <i>&lt;filename&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Use a separate image as a transparency mask for the foreground image during composition.<br><br><b><b>-matte</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Ensure an alpha channel is present in the output image, preserving transparency.<br><br><b><b>-tile</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Repeat the foreground image as a tile pattern over the entire background image.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <b>composite</b> command is a powerful utility from the <i>ImageMagick</i> suite, designed for combining two or more images into a single output image. It primarily takes a foreground image and composites it onto a background image using various methods, including different composition operators (e.g., <i>Over</i>, <i>Multiply</i>, <i>Screen</i>, <i>Dissolve</i>), alpha blending, and masking.<br><br>It's widely used for tasks like watermarking, adding logos, creating special effects, or merging graphical elements seamlessly. The command allows fine control over the placement, size, and transparency of the overlaid images, making it an essential tool for automated image manipulation in scripts and workflows. It supports a wide range of image formats and sophisticated blending modes.


title: CAVEATS
content:
The standalone <b>composite</b> command is functionally superseded by the <b>magick composite</b> sub-command in <i>ImageMagick 7</i> and newer versions. While still supported, the newer syntax offers better integration with the unified <b>magick</b> command-line interface.<br><br>Complex image manipulation tasks may sometimes require chaining multiple <b>composite</b> operations or leveraging the more general <b>magick convert</b> command for greater flexibility. Memory usage can become significant when processing very large images, especially with intricate operations or extensive tiling.


title: COLOR MANAGEMENT
content:
<i>ImageMagick</i> provides full support for color management, including the use of <i>ICC color profiles</i>. The <b>composite</b> command respects and applies these profiles during operations, which is critical for maintaining color accuracy and consistency when combining images from diverse sources.


title: TRANSPARENCY HANDLING
content:
The command intelligently utilizes <i>alpha channels</i> for transparency if present in either the foreground or background images. Users should be aware that if transparency is not desired, the alpha channel may need to be explicitly removed or flattened using other <i>ImageMagick</i> utilities like <b>convert</b> or <b>mogrify</b> prior to composition.


title: HISTORY
content:
The <b>composite</b> command has been a fundamental component of the <i>ImageMagick</i> suite since its initial release in 1990. Developed by John Cristy and maintained by a global community, <i>ImageMagick</i> rapidly evolved, and <b>composite</b> with it, gaining new composition operators, color space support, and performance enhancements over decades.<br><br>Its long-standing presence underscores its importance in open-source image processing. Although <i>ImageMagick 7</i> introduced the unified <b>magick</b> command, the standalone <b>composite</b> remains a widely recognized and stable utility for image overlay tasks.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>-c</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enables client-side shadows, which are typically faster but might be less accurate for some applications.<br><br><b>-r <I>radius</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the shadow blur radius (default: 12).<br><br><b>-o <I>opacity</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the shadow opacity (default: 0.75).<br><br><b>-l <I>offset</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the shadow left offset (default: -15).<br><br><b>-t <I>offset</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the shadow top offset (default: -15).<br><br><b>-s</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enables server-side shadows, which are drawn by the X server (less common now).<br><br><b>-f</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enables fading effects for windows (fade in on creation, fade out on destruction).<br><br><b>-D <I>step</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the fade step for fade-in (default: 0.03).<br><br><b>-I <I>duration</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the fade-in duration in milliseconds (default: 200).<br><br><b>-O <I>duration</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the fade-out duration in milliseconds (default: 200).<br><br><b>-C</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Disables shadows on dock/toolbar windows (e.g., <code>_NET_WM_WINDOW_TYPE_DOCK</code>).<br><br><b>-S</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Disables shadows on splash screen windows (e.g., <code>_NET_WM_WINDOW_TYPE_SPLASH</code>).<br><br><b>-F</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Disables fading when unredirecting windows (e.g., fullscreen applications).<br><br><b>-k</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Ignores shaped windows (windows with non-rectangular outlines).<br><br><b>-n <I>rule</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies an opacity rule for windows based on their properties, e.g., <I>!name = "xterm":80</I>.<br><br><b>-z</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Disables the use of ARGB visual, falling back to older methods.<br><br><b>-vsync</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enables vertical synchronization to prevent screen tearing.<br><br><b>-display <I>display</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the X display to connect to.<br><br><b>-help</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays a help message and exits.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<b>xcompmgr</b> is a lightweight and standalone composite manager for the X Window System. It enables various visual effects such as drop shadows for windows, real-time window transparency, and fading effects for window opening and closing. Designed to be simple and unobtrusive, it provides basic compositing functionality without the overhead of a full desktop environment. It's often used with minimalistic window managers like Openbox, Fluxbox, or i3 to add a touch of modern aesthetics to a lightweight setup. While more advanced compositors like Picom or the built-in compositors of modern desktop environments offer richer features, <b>xcompmgr</b> remains a viable option for users seeking a simple and resource-friendly way to enhance their X desktop with subtle visual flair.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<b>xcompmgr</b> provides only basic compositing features. More advanced visual effects, animations, or robust tear-free rendering might require a more modern and feature-rich compositor like Picom. It is not actively developed and maintained as much as it once was, and some configurations might still experience screen tearing without the <b>-vsync</b> option or proper driver setup.


title: STARTING XCOMPMGR
content:
To use <b>xcompmgr</b>, you typically start it automatically when your X session begins. This can be done by adding a line like <I>xcompmgr -c -r 9 -o .9 -l -15 -t -15 -f -D 5 -vsync &</I> to your <I>~/.xinitrc</I> file, or your window manager's autostart script (e.g., <I>~/.config/openbox/autostart</I> for Openbox). The <I>&</I> symbol ensures it runs in the background.


title: HISTORY
content:
Developed as part of the X.Org project, <b>xcompmgr</b> emerged as an early solution to bring basic compositing capabilities to the X Window System. Its primary goal was to provide a lightweight way to add visual enhancements like shadows and transparency, which were becoming standard in more feature-rich desktop environments. It played a significant role in enabling these effects for minimal window managers before the advent of more sophisticated compositors, and its design influenced later, more advanced projects.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>--debug</b>[=<i>level</i>]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the debug level for the daemon. The default level is 1. Higher levels provide more verbose output for troubleshooting.<br><br><b><b>--nofork</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Disables forking the daemon into the background. This is useful when running <i>firewalld</i> in the foreground for debugging purposes or as part of a non-systemd service.<br><br><b><b>--debug-gc</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enables garbage collection debugging for internal Python objects. This option is primarily intended for developers and advanced troubleshooting of <i>firewalld</i>'s internal workings.<br><br><b><b>--version</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays the version information of the <i>firewalld</i> daemon and then exits immediately.<br><br><b><b>--help</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Shows a help message summarizing the available command-line options for the <i>firewalld</i> daemon and then exits immediately.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>firewalld</i> is a firewall service that provides a dynamically managed firewall with support for network zones to define the trust level for network connections or interfaces. It offers a user-friendly way to manage <i>netfilter</i> rules without directly interacting with <i>iptables</i> or <i>nftables</i>.<br><br>The service runs as a daemon, allowing firewall rules to be updated without dropping existing network connections. This dynamic nature is particularly useful in environments where network configurations change frequently, such as laptops connecting to various Wi-Fi networks or virtual machines in cloud environments.<br><br>Key features include pre-defined zones (e.g., public, home, trusted) to easily assign trust levels, support for services, ports, port forwarding, masquerading, ICMP blocking, and flexible 'rich rules' for advanced configurations. It abstracts the complexities of the underlying <i>netfilter</i> system, providing a high-level, D-Bus driven interface.


title: CAVEATS
content:
Using <i>firewalld</i> directly with low-level tools like <i>iptables</i> or <i>nftables</i> can lead to conflicts and unexpected firewall behavior, as <i>firewalld</i> manages the underlying <i>netfilter</i> rules itself.<br><br>Configuration changes made without explicitly specifying a 'permanent' option (typically via <b>firewall-cmd</b>) are only applied to the runtime configuration and will be lost upon a service reload or system reboot.<br><br>Understanding the concept of zones is crucial for effective management; misassigning an interface to an incorrect zone can expose services or inadvertently block legitimate traffic.<br><br>The syntax for 'rich rules,' while powerful for advanced configurations, can be complex and requires careful crafting and testing to avoid security loopholes or connectivity issues.


title: MANAGEMENT WITH FIREWALL-CMD
content:
While <i>firewalld</i> is the daemon service, its primary configuration tool for end-users and administrators is the command-line client <b>firewall-cmd</b>. This utility offers extensive options to interact with the running <i>firewalld</i> instance, allowing users to add/remove services, ports, rich rules, activate/deactivate zones, and manage permanent configurations. Most practical firewall management tasks are performed using <b>firewall-cmd</b>, not the <i>firewalld</i> command directly for configuration.


title: ZONES: THE CORE CONCEPT
content:
<i>firewalld</i> organizes firewall rules into 'zones,' which are essentially predefined sets of rules for different trust levels. Examples include <b>public</b> (untrusted networks), <b>home</b> (trusted home network), <b>trusted</b> (all network connections accepted), <b>internal</b>, <b>external</b>, <b>dmz</b>, <b>block</b>, and <b>drop</b>. Each network interface or connection can be assigned to a zone, automatically applying the associated rules, thereby simplifying policy management significantly. Services and ports are then enabled or disabled within these zones.


title: RUNTIME VS. PERMANENT CONFIGURATION
content:
<i>firewalld</i> distinguishes between runtime and permanent configurations. <b>Runtime</b> changes are applied immediately to the active firewall but are ephemeral, meaning they are lost upon a service reload or system reboot. <b>Permanent</b> changes, in contrast, are written to configuration files and are applied after a service reload or system reboot, ensuring they persist across system sessions. To apply permanent changes immediately without a reboot, a <b>firewall-cmd --reload</b> operation is often required after making permanent modifications.


title: HISTORY
content:
<i>firewalld</i> was initially introduced with Fedora 18 (around 2012-2013) as a modern, dynamic alternative to the traditional <i>iptables</i> service scripts. Developed primarily by Red Hat, its inception aimed to address the limitations of static firewall configurations in increasingly dynamic network environments, such as those found in cloud computing, containerization, and mobile devices.<br><br>It brought the concept of network zones to simplify firewall policy management, allowing administrators to define trust levels for network interfaces and connections rather than managing individual low-level rules. Over time, it has become the default firewall solution in Red Hat Enterprise Linux (RHEL) and its derivatives, as well as many other Linux distributions, leveraging <i>netfilter</i> as its backend while providing a higher-level abstraction.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-s</b>, <b>--silly</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Prints a predefined silly message instead of displaying the actual content of any specified <b>FILE</b>s. This option overrides any transformation or error simulation.</i><br><br><b><b>-e</b>, <b>--error-sim</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Simulates a read error for each specified <b>FILE</b>, printing an error message indicating a problem reading the file. No actual file content is displayed.</i><br><br><b><b>-t</b> <i>&lt;type&gt;</i>, <b>--transform</b> <i>&lt;type&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Applies a whimsical text transformation to the content of each <b>FILE</b>. The available &lt;type&gt; values are:</i><br><i>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<b>reverse</b>: Reverses the order of characters in each line.</i><br><i>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<b>uppercase</b>: Converts all characters to uppercase.</i><br><i>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<b>leet</b>: Converts text to leetspeak (e.g., 'e' -> '3', 'a' -> '4').</i><br><br><b><b>-V</b>, <b>--version</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Displays the version information for <b>mockcat</b> and exits.</i><br><br><b><b>-h</b>, <b>--help</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Shows the command's help message, including usage and options, and exits.</i><br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i><b>mockcat</b> is a playful utility designed to mimic the behavior of the standard <b>cat</b> command, but with added features for humorous or testing purposes. Unlike <b>cat</b>, <b>mockcat</b> can intentionally simulate errors, apply whimsical text transformations, or display predefined silly messages instead of actual file content. It's particularly useful for developers who need to test how their scripts handle various outputs, including error conditions, without altering real files or environments. It can also be a fun tool for injecting a bit of lightheartedness into command-line interactions. <b>mockcat</b> processes files sequentially, applying specified options to each file argument. Its core design emphasizes harmless output manipulation, ensuring no file system changes occur.</i><br><br><i>The command aims to provide a sandbox for experimenting with output formats, making it a unique tool in the Linux utility belt for both educational and entertainment purposes.</i>


title: CAVEATS
content:
<i><b>mockcat</b> is designed for playful output manipulation and testing purposes. It <b>does not</b> modify any actual files on your system. All error simulations are purely for display and do not reflect real file system or permission issues. Text transformations are basic and might not perfectly handle all complex character encodings or multi-byte characters.</i>


title: USAGE EXAMPLES
content:
<i>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display content of '<b>file.txt</b>' normally (like <b>cat</b>):</i><br><i>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<b>mockcat file.txt</b></i><br><br><i>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Print a silly message instead of file content:</i><br><i>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<b>mockcat -s important_doc.md personal_notes.txt</b></i><br><br><i>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Simulate an error reading a system file:</i><br><i>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<b>mockcat -e /etc/shadow</b></i><br><br><i>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Reverse the text in '<b>poem.txt</b>':</i><br><i>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<b>mockcat -t reverse poem.txt</b></i><br><br><i>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Convert '<b>secret.conf</b>' to leetspeak:</i><br><i>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<b>mockcat -t leet secret.conf</b></i>


title: DEFAULT SILLY MESSAGE
content:
<i>When the <b>--silly</b> option is used, <b>mockcat</b> will output: "Why did the data byte break up with the network packet? Because they had too many *unresolved dependencies*!" This message is hardcoded and cannot be customized via command-line options.</i>


title: HISTORY
content:
<i>Conceived in late 2022 as a whimsical side project, <b>mockcat</b> was initially a developer's way to quickly test error output formatting without creating actual error conditions. Its ability to perform silly transformations quickly gained traction in internal dev teams for lighthearted pranks and creative debugging. The project was open-sourced in early 2023, attracting a small community of contributors who appreciated its unique blend of utility and humor. It continues to be maintained as a niche tool for harmless output experimentation and fun.</i>


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<pre>oras [OPTIONS] COMMAND [ARG...]</pre><br>Common global options include:<br><pre>oras --help<br>oras --version<br>oras --debug COMMAND</pre><br>Common commands:<br><pre>oras push [OPTIONS] NAME[:TAG|@DIGEST] FILE[:TYPE] [FILE[:TYPE]...]<br>oras pull [OPTIONS] NAME[:TAG|@DIGEST]<br>oras attach [OPTIONS] NAME[:TAG|@DIGEST] FILE[:TYPE] [FILE[:TYPE]...]<br>oras login [OPTIONS] SERVER</pre>


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>--help</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<I>Displays help information for oras or a specific subcommand.</I><br><br><b>--version</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<I>Shows the version of the oras CLI.</I><br><br><b>--debug</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<I>Enables debug logging for more verbose output.</I><br><br><b>--registry-config &lt;file&gt;</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<I>Specify a custom registry configuration file.</I><br><br><b>--insecure</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<I>Allow connections to insecure registries.</I><br><br><b>--verbose</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<I>Enable verbose output.</I><br><br><b>--config &lt;file&gt; (for 'push')</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<I>Path to the configuration file for the artifact manifest.</I><br><br><b>--artifact-type &lt;type&gt; (for 'push', 'attach')</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<I>Specify the artifact type for the uploaded content (e.g., <B>application/vnd.cncf.sbom.cyclonedx+json</B>).</I><br><br><b>--annotation &lt;key=value&gt; (for 'push', 'attach')</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<I>Add annotations to the manifest or artifact.</I><br><br><b>--output &lt;path&gt; (for 'pull')</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<I>Specify the output directory for pulled artifacts.</I><br><br><b>--path &lt;path&gt; (for 'pull')</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<I>Specify the output path for a specific file when pulling.</I><br><br><b>--media-type &lt;type&gt; (for 'pull')</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<I>Pull only files matching the specified media type.</I><br><br><b>--referrers-as-subject (for 'pull', 'attach')</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<I>Treat the current artifact as a subject for referrers, pulling associated content.</I><br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <b>oras</b> command-line interface (CLI) is a powerful tool designed to manage <B>OCI (Open Container Initiative) artifacts</B> within OCI-compliant registries. While commonly associated with Docker images, OCI registries can store a much broader range of content, including software bills of materials (SBOMs), signatures, WebAssembly modules, configuration files, and more. <br><br><b>oras</b> enables users to <B>push</B>, <B>pull</B>, <B>copy</B>, and <B>tag</B> these diverse artifacts, treating them as first-class citizens in a registry. This capability is crucial for implementing robust software supply chain security practices, as it allows for the secure storage and distribution of all related components alongside container images. It simplifies the process of managing complex dependencies and ensures that all elements of an application, from code to metadata, are versioned and accessible through a standardized registry. <br><br>It extends the utility of container registries beyond just containers, making them central hubs for all types of cloud-native components and metadata.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<b>oras</b> relies on the OCI Distribution Specification. While widely adopted, ensure your target registry is fully compliant and supports the specific features (like <B>referrers</B>) you intend to use. <br><br>Authentication with <b>oras</b> is typically handled via <B>oras login</B>, but it can also integrate with Docker's credential store, which might require proper configuration. <br><br>As the OCI artifact ecosystem continues to evolve, some features or behaviors might change with newer versions of <b>oras</b> or registry implementations.


title: AUTHENTICATION
content:
<B>oras login &lt;registry-server&gt;</B> is used to authenticate with OCI registries, similar to <B>docker login</B>. It stores credentials in a configuration file (e.g., <B>~/.config/oras/config.json</B> or <B>~/.docker/config.json</B>).


title: ARTIFACT REFERRERS
content:
A key feature of <b>oras</b> is its support for OCI <B>referrers</B>, which allow artifacts to point to other related artifacts (e.g., a container image can "refer" to its associated SBOM, vulnerability scan results, or digital signatures). This enables a robust and verifiable software supply chain.


title: HISTORY
content:
<b>oras</b> originated from Microsoft in collaboration with various partners and was later contributed to the <B>CNCF (Cloud Native Computing Foundation)</B> as a sandbox project. Its development was driven by the need to extend OCI registries beyond just container images to support a broader range of artifacts, crucial for modern software supply chains and security. It plays a pivotal role in implementing the <B>OCI Distribution Specification's</B> capabilities for managing non-image artifacts and <B>referrers</B>, which link artifacts together (e.g., an image to its SBOM or signature).


title: SEE ALSO
content:
docker(1): <I>The de-facto CLI for managing Docker containers and images.</I>, podman(1): <I>A daemonless container engine for developing, managing, and running OCI containers.</I>, skopeo(1): <I>A command-line utility for various operations on container images and image repositories, including copying between registries without a daemon.</I>, regctl(1): <I>A tool for interacting with OCI registries, often used for advanced manifest and blob operations.</I>


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>maildrop</b> [<b>-d</b> <i>user</i>] [<b>-f</b> <i>sender</i>] [<b>-a</b> <i>account</i>] [<b>-M</b> <i>file</i>] [<b>-V</b> <i>variable</i>=<i>value</i>] [<i>size_limit</i>]<br><br>Common usage often involves piping mail to it:<br><i>/usr/sbin/sendmail -i -oem -f sender recipient</i> | <b>maildrop</b>


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-d</b> <i>user</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Delivers mail for the specified <i>user</i>. Essential for system-wide delivery.<br><br><b><b>-f</b> <i>sender</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the envelope <i>sender</i> for the message, used for identification.<br><br><b><b>-a</b> <i>account</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the <i>account</i> name for Maildir quota calculations.<br><br><b><b>-A</b> <i>header</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Appends an additional <i>header</i> to the message before filtering.<br><br><b><b>-M</b> <i>file</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Uses an alternate <i>file</i> as the maildroprc script instead of the default.<br><br><b><b>-L</b> <i>N</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the logging level to <i>N</i> (numeric), for verbose output or debugging.<br><br><b><b>-m</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Prevents mail delivery if the maildroprc script encounters an error.<br><br><b><b>-V</b> <i>variable</i>=<i>value</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets a custom <i>variable</i> with a given <i>value</i> for the maildroprc script.<br><br><b><b>-c</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Checks the syntax of the maildroprc file and exits, without processing mail.<br><br><b><b>-w</b> <i>N</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the maximum bytes <i>N</i> for <i>xfilter</i> or <i>xexec</i> command output.<br><br><b><b>-t</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enables test mode; mail is processed but not actually delivered.<br><br><b><b>-E</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Disables enforcement of Maildir quota limits during delivery.<br><br><b><b>-R</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Prevents the execution of the global maildroprc configuration file.<br><br><b><b>-U</b> <i>uid</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the User ID (<i>uid</i>) for the maildroprc script process.<br><br><b><b>-G</b> <i>gid</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the Group ID (<i>gid</i>) for the maildroprc script process.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<b>maildrop</b> is a highly configurable local mail delivery agent (MDA) designed for Unix-like systems. It reads an email message, typically from standard input, and processes it based on a set of rules defined in a configuration file, most commonly <i>.maildroprc</i> in the user's home directory. <br><br><b>maildrop</b> excels at filtering, sorting, and automatically managing incoming email. It can deliver mail to various mailbox formats, including the robust Maildir format or traditional mbox files. Additionally, it can forward mail, execute external programs (e.g., spam/virus scanners), send auto-replies, and perform complex mail transformations. Its powerful, scriptable language allows users to implement sophisticated mail processing logic, making it a versatile tool for both individual mail management and server-side filtering.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<b>Security:</b> Care must be taken with <i>.maildroprc</i> scripts, especially when allowing arbitrary commands via <i>xfilter</i> or <i>xexec</i>. Malicious scripts could execute unwanted commands with the user's permissions or escalate privileges if <b>maildrop</b> runs with elevated rights.<br><br><b>Performance:</b> Complex <i>.maildroprc</i> scripts involving many external commands can impact mail delivery performance, particularly on busy mail servers.<br><br><b>Maildir vs. mbox:</b> <b>maildrop</b> is heavily optimized for the Maildir format, offering greater robustness. While it can deliver to mbox, Maildir is generally recommended for better integrity and performance.


title: CONFIGURATION FILE (<I>.MAILDROPRC</I>)
content:
The primary configuration for <b>maildrop</b> is defined in a file named <i>.maildroprc</i>, typically located in the user's home directory. This file contains a sequence of rules written in <b>maildrop</b>'s specialized scripting language. These rules dictate how incoming mail is processed, including filtering based on headers or body content, delivering to specific folders, forwarding, sending auto-replies, or executing external programs. A global configuration, often found at <i>/etc/maildroprc</i>, can also be present.


title: MAILDIR FORMAT
content:
<b>maildrop</b> is engineered with robust support for the Maildir format, a structured directory system for storing email. Unlike the mbox format, which aggregates all messages into a single file, Maildir stores each email as a unique file within a specific directory structure (<i>tmp</i>, <i>new</i>, <i>cur</i>). This design inherently avoids mail locking issues, prevents corruption, and offers improved efficiency, especially in environments with concurrent access or high volumes of mail.


title: ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES
content:
Within the <i>.maildroprc</i> script, <b>maildrop</b> automatically sets several environment variables, such as <b>FROM</b>, <b>TO</b>, <b>RECIPIENT</b>, and <b>SENDER</b>. These variables provide crucial contextual information about the email currently being processed, enabling scripts to make decisions based on message metadata. Users can also define custom variables for their scripts using the <b>-V</b> option.


title: HISTORY
content:
<b>maildrop</b> was developed by Sam Varshavchik as an integral component of the Courier Mail Server project. It emerged as a powerful and secure alternative to existing mail delivery agents like <b>procmail</b>, distinguished by its strong, native support for the Maildir format. Maildir, which stores each email in a separate file, offers significant advantages such as atomicity (reducing mail corruption risk) and superior performance for large mailboxes compared to the traditional mbox format. <b>maildrop</b>'s design prioritized providing a robust and highly scriptable solution for local mail filtering and delivery, solidifying its position as a favored choice among both individual users and system administrators.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<code>hcidump [-i &lt;device&gt;] [-s &lt;snapshot&gt;] [-t] [-a] [-X] [-Y] [-O] [-N] [-R] [-P &lt;file&gt;] [-r &lt;file&gt;] [-w &lt;file&gt;] [-F &lt;filter&gt;] [-m &lt;mask&gt;] [-V] [-C] [-x] [-h]</code>


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><code>-i &lt;device&gt;</code></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify the local Bluetooth device to monitor, e.g., 'hci0'.<br><br><b><code>-s &lt;snapshot&gt;</code></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Set the snapshot length for packet capture, limiting the amount of data captured per packet.<br><br><b><code>-t</code></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Prepend timestamps to each packet dump, showing when it was captured.<br><br><b><code>-a</code></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Dump all packets, including raw data. This is often the default behavior.<br><br><b><code>-X</code></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Dump packets in hexadecimal format.<br><br><b><code>-Y</code></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Dump packets in ASCII format.<br><br><b><code>-O</code></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Don't dump raw data, only parsed HCI events/commands/data.<br><br><b><code>-N</code></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Don't parse numbers in the output, displaying them as raw hex.<br><br><b><code>-R</code></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Reverse output order, displaying the latest packets at the end of the output.<br><br><b><code>-P &lt;file&gt;</code></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Use a specified file for input/output redirection, often in conjunction with <code>-r</code> or <code>-w</code>.<br><br><b><code>-r &lt;file&gt;</code></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Read packets from a specified PCAP file instead of capturing live traffic.<br><br><b><code>-w &lt;file&gt;</code></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Write captured packets to a specified PCAP file for later analysis.<br><br><b><code>-F &lt;filter&gt;</code></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Filter packets by type. Common filters include 'command', 'event', 'acl', 'sco', 'vendor'.<br><br><b><code>-m &lt;mask&gt;</code></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Apply a mask to the filter, typically used with numeric filters.<br><br><b><code>-V</code></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display the version information of <code>hcidump</code>.<br><br><b><code>-C</code></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Only show HCI commands and events, omitting ACL (Asynchronous Connection-Less) and SCO (Synchronous Connection-Oriented) data packets.<br><br><b><code>-x</code></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Show raw data in hexadecimal format (similar to <code>-X</code> but can apply specifically to data packets when parsing is active).<br><br><b><code>-h</code></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display a brief help message and exit.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<code>hcidump</code> is a powerful command-line utility for capturing, parsing, and displaying raw Bluetooth Host Controller Interface (HCI) packets on Linux systems. It acts as a sniffer, intercepting the communication between the Bluetooth host (typically the Linux kernel's Bluetooth stack) and the Bluetooth controller (the physical Bluetooth adapter). This tool is invaluable for developers, system administrators, and network analysts who need to debug Bluetooth connectivity issues, monitor Bluetooth traffic, or analyze the intricacies of Bluetooth protocols at a low level. It can display packets in a human-readable format, including timestamps and detailed packet dissections, and supports various output options like hexadecimal and ASCII dumps. Furthermore, <code>hcidump</code> can save captured data to standard PCAP files, allowing for later offline analysis with other tools like Wireshark, or read previously saved PCAP files.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<br><b>Root Privileges:</b> <code>hcidump</code> generally requires root privileges or appropriate capabilities to capture raw Bluetooth HCI packets directly from the device interface.<br><b>High Volume Output:</b> With active Bluetooth traffic, the command can generate a very large volume of output, making it challenging to interpret without specific filters.<br><b>Complexity:</b> Understanding the output requires familiarity with the Bluetooth HCI specification and general Bluetooth protocol knowledge.<br><b>Legacy Status:</b> For live packet capture, newer BlueZ distributions often recommend using <i>btmon(1)</i>, which offers more advanced filtering and better integration with modern Linux logging mechanisms. However, <i>hcidump</i> remains highly useful, especially for processing existing PCAP files.


title: FLEXIBLE FILTERING
content:
<code>hcidump</code> provides powerful filtering capabilities (via <b>-F</b> and <b>-m</b>) that allow users to focus on specific types of Bluetooth traffic, such as commands, events, ACL data, or SCO data, significantly reducing noise during analysis.


title: PCAP INTEROPERABILITY
content:
A key feature is its ability to save captured packets to standard PCAP (Packet Capture) files using the <b>-w</b> option and to read from them with the <b>-r</b> option. This enables seamless integration with other network analysis tools like Wireshark, facilitating deeper graphical analysis of Bluetooth traffic.


title: HISTORY
content:
<br><i>hcidump</i> is an integral part of the BlueZ project, the official Linux Bluetooth protocol stack. It was developed early in BlueZ's history to provide essential debugging and development capabilities for the Bluetooth stack and applications on Linux. For many years, it was the primary tool for low-level Bluetooth traffic analysis. While its role in live packet capture is increasingly being complemented or superseded by <i>btmon(1)</i> in contemporary BlueZ releases due to <i>btmon</i>'s enhanced features and system integration, <i>hcidump</i> continues to be widely used and remains a valuable utility, particularly for its robust PCAP file handling.


title: SEE ALSO
content:
<i>hcitool(1)</i>, <i>hciconfig(8)</i>, <i>sdptool(1)</i>, <i>l2ping(8)</i>, <i>btmon(1)</i>, <i>wireshark(1)</i>


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>regctl</b> [<i>global options</i>] <i>&lt;command&gt;</i> [<i>command options</i>] [<i>arguments</i>]<br><br>Common Commands:<br>&nbsp;&nbsp;<b>regctl pull</b> [<i>options</i>] <i>&lt;image_ref&gt;</i> [<i>&lt;file_path&gt;</i>]<br>&nbsp;&nbsp;<b>regctl push</b> [<i>options</i>] <i>&lt;file_path&gt;</i> <i>&lt;image_ref&gt;</i><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;<b>regctl manifest get</b> [<i>options</i>] <i>&lt;image_ref&gt;</i><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;<b>regctl login</b> [<i>&lt;registry&gt;</i>]<br>&nbsp;&nbsp;<b>regctl blob get</b> [<i>options</i>] <i>&lt;image_ref&gt;</i> <i>&lt;digest&gt;</i>


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>-c, --config <i>&lt;path&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify an alternate configuration file for credentials and settings.<br><br><b>--host-platform <i>&lt;os/arch&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Set the host platform for local image/manifest operations, e.g., 'linux/amd64'.<br><br><b>--platform <i>&lt;os/arch&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify the target platform for manifest operations (e.g., manifest get/create).<br><br><b>-v, --verbose</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enable verbose output for debugging and detailed operation information.<br><br><b>--user-agent <i>&lt;string&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Set the User-Agent header for HTTP requests to the registry.<br><br><b>--insecure</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Allow communication with registries over insecure HTTP or with unverified HTTPS certificates.<br><br><b>--skip-config-hosts</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Do not load host-specific configuration from the config file.<br><br><b>--log-format <i>&lt;format&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Set log output format (text, json).<br><br><b>--log-level <i>&lt;level&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Set log level (trace, debug, info, warn, error).<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<b>regctl</b> is a powerful and versatile command-line interface (CLI) tool designed for deep interaction with OCI (Open Container Initiative) compatible registries. Written in Go, it offers a granular level of control over various registry components, including images, manifests, blobs, repositories, and tags. Unlike higher-level container clients like <i>docker</i> or <i>podman</i> that abstract away much of the registry interaction, <b>regctl</b> provides direct access to the registry's API, making it an indispensable tool for automation, scripting, and advanced registry management tasks.<br><br>Key functionalities include pulling and pushing images, creating and manipulating image manifests (including multi-platform manifests), managing individual blobs, and listing or deleting repositories and tags. It supports authentication mechanisms for secure registry access and can work with both local and remote registries. Its design emphasizes headless operations, making it ideal for CI/CD pipelines, custom registry solutions, and scenarios requiring precise control over image data stored in OCI registries.


title: CAVEATS
content:
While <b>regctl</b> offers powerful low-level control, users should be aware of several considerations:<br><br><i>Security</i>: Direct interaction with registry APIs means that improper handling of credentials or using the <code>--insecure</code> flag can expose sensitive data. Always use secure practices and strong authentication.<br><br><i>Complexity</i>: Its granular control can be more complex than higher-level tools for simple tasks. Understanding OCI specifications (manifests, blobs, layers) is beneficial for effective use.<br><br><i>No Image Execution</i>: <b>regctl</b> is purely for registry interaction; it does not build, run, or manage containers or images on a local host filesystem directly (beyond pulling/pushing content). For these tasks, tools like <i>docker</i>, <i>podman</i>, or <i>crictl</i> are required.


title: SCRIPTABILITY AND AUTOMATION
content:
<i><b>regctl</b></i> is designed from the ground up for scripting and automation. Its command structure, predictable output (often JSON), and focus on direct registry API interaction make it ideal for use in CI/CD pipelines, custom tooling, and automated workflows where precise control over image and artifact management in OCI registries is required. It can be a vital component for tasks like garbage collection, manifest manipulation for multi-architecture images, and synchronized content deployment.


title: OCI COMPLIANCE
content:
<i><b>regctl</b></i> strictly adheres to the Open Container Initiative (OCI) Distribution Specification. This ensures broad compatibility with any OCI-compliant registry, providing a consistent interface regardless of the underlying registry implementation (e.g., Docker Hub, Quay.io, GitHub Container Registry, Azure Container Registry, local registries).


title: HISTORY
content:
<b>regctl</b> is an open-source project, primarily developed by Greg O'Malley (GoCD team). It emerged as a dedicated tool for interacting with OCI registries, filling a niche for scenarios requiring direct and programmatic control over registry content, particularly in CI/CD environments and for specialized registry management tasks. Written in Go, it leverages the Go standard library and various OCI-related libraries, providing a robust and performant solution for registry operations. Its development reflects a growing need for versatile, automation-friendly tools within the cloud-native ecosystem, distinct from general-purpose container engines.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>cupp</b> <i>[MODE_OPTION]</i> <i>[OTHER_OPTIONS]</i><br><b>cupp</b> <b>-i</b><br><b>cupp</b> <b>-d</b><br><b>cupp</b> <b>-w</b> <i>&lt;URL&gt;</i><br><b>cupp</b> <b>-c</b> <i>&lt;WORDLIST_PATH&gt;</i>


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-i</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Run in <i>interactive mode</i>, prompting the user for personal information to generate a highly targeted wordlist.<br><br><b><b>-d</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Use <i>default mode</i> to generate wordlists based on pre-defined datasets, often for common passwords or patterns.<br><br><b><b>-w &lt;URL&gt;</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Engage <i>web-spider mode</i>, extracting keywords and potential password candidates directly from the specified URL.<br><br><b><b>-c &lt;WORDLIST_PATH&gt;</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Activate <i>convert mode</i>, allowing the conversion or transformation of an existing wordlist (e.g., adding leetspeak, numbers).<br><br><b><b>-a</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Append all</i> common patterns, numbers, special characters, and leetspeak variations to the generated words.<br><br><b><b>-f &lt;FILE&gt;</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify the <i>output file</i> path where the generated wordlist will be saved. Default is 'result.txt'.<br><br><b><b>-e &lt;FILE&gt;</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>Extend wordlist</i> by appending content from an external file, useful for incorporating custom lists or themes.<br><br><b><b>-v</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enable <i>verbose output</i>, providing more detailed information during the wordlist generation process.<br><br><b><b>-h</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display the <i>help message</i> and exit.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<b>cupp</b> (Common User Passwords Profiler) is a powerful and versatile wordlist generator primarily used in penetration testing and ethical hacking for creating customized password dictionaries. Unlike generic wordlists, <b>cupp</b> specializes in generating highly targeted password lists based on personal information about the target, such as their name, nickname, date of birth, partner's name, pet's name, company, and hobbies. This approach significantly increases the chances of cracking passwords, as many users tend to use easily memorable personal data.<br><br>The tool offers several modes of operation, including an <i>interactive mode</i> (<b>-i</b>) that prompts the user for various details, a <i>predefined mode</i> (<b>-d</b>) for using existing databases, and a <i>web-spider mode</i> (<b>-w</b>) to extract keywords from a target website. It also supports appending common numbers, special characters, and leetspeak variations, further enhancing the generated wordlists' effectiveness. <b>cupp</b> is a crucial utility for security professionals seeking to test password strength and identify potential vulnerabilities in systems.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<b>cupp</b> is a powerful tool designed for ethical security testing and educational purposes. Misuse, such as generating wordlists for unauthorized access to systems, is illegal and unethical. The effectiveness of generated wordlists depends heavily on the accuracy and completeness of the provided target information, and they are not guaranteed to crack all passwords, especially strong, random ones. Generating very large wordlists can consume significant disk space and memory.


title: ETHICAL USE STATEMENT
content:
It is crucial to emphasize that <b>cupp</b> must only be used for legitimate purposes, such as auditing your own systems, testing the security of systems with explicit permission from the owner, or for educational purposes in a controlled environment. Unauthorized use against any system is illegal and can lead to severe penalties.


title: OUTPUT FORMAT
content:
The wordlists generated by <b>cupp</b> are plain text files, with each potential password candidate listed on a new line. This format is universally compatible and can be directly fed into various password cracking tools like <b>John the Ripper</b> or <b>Hashcat</b>.


title: HISTORY
content:
<b>cupp</b> was created by 'The-Z' (Mohamed Abdelbaset) with the aim of generating highly targeted password lists based on personal information, a common flaw in user password choices. Its development marked a shift from brute-force wordlist generation to a more intelligent, information-driven approach. It quickly gained traction within the cybersecurity community and is now a staple in many penetration testing distributions like Kali Linux, valued for its effectiveness in social engineering-aware security assessments.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>stylelint</b> [<i>options</i>] <i><files> ...</i><br><b>stylelint</b> [<i>options</i>] -- <i><stdin></i>


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>--config <path></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify a configuration file. <i>(e.g., <code>--config .stylelintrc.json</code>)</i><br><br><b>--fix</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Automatically fix a majority of stylistic warnings.<br><br><b>--format <string></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify the output formatter. <i>(e.g., <code>--format compact</code>, <code>stylish</code>, <code>json</code>, <code>string</code>, <code>unix</code>, <code>tap</code>, <code>verbose</code>)</i><br><br><b>--ignore-path <path></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify a file to ignore patterns from. <i>(e.g., <code>--ignore-path .stylelintignore</code>)</i><br><br><b>--ignore-pattern <pattern></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify a pattern of files to ignore. <i>(e.g., <code>--ignore-pattern "**/dist/**"</code>)</i><br><br><b>--syntax <string></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify a non-standard syntax to parse. <i>(e.g., <code>scss</code>, <code>less</code>, <code>sugarss</code>, <code>css-in-js</code>)</i><br><br><b>--color, --no-color</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Force enabling or disabling of color output.<br><br><b>--version</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Output the <b>stylelint</b> version number.<br><br><b>--help</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Output usage information and available options.<br><br><b>--quiet</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Do not report warnings; only errors are shown.<br><br><b>--allow-empty-input</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Allow the file pattern to not match any files without error.<br><br><b>--max-warnings <int></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Set a limit for the number of warnings; exceeding it causes an exit with status code 2.<br><br><b>--stdin</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Accept input from stdin.<br><br><b>--stdin-filename <string></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify the filename to process stdin as, for proper rules application.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<b>stylelint</b> is a powerful and modern linter that helps you avoid errors and enforce consistent conventions in your stylesheets. It supports a wide range of CSS-like syntaxes, including CSS, SCSS, Less, and SugarSS, and is highly configurable with over 170 built-in rules. Developers can create custom rules and plugins, making it adaptable to almost any project's styling guidelines.<br><br><b>stylelint</b> can be run from the command line, integrated into build processes, or used within IDEs, providing immediate feedback and contributing to higher code quality, maintainability, and collaboration across development teams. It's an essential tool for maintaining large and small frontend codebases by ensuring code consistency and catching potential issues early.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<ul><li><b>Performance</b>: For very large projects or extensive rule sets, <b>stylelint</b> can be resource-intensive, potentially slowing down build processes or pre-commit hooks.</li><li><b>Configuration Complexity</b>: Setting up and maintaining a comprehensive <i>.stylelintrc</i> configuration can be complex, especially with numerous custom rules and overrides for different file types.</li><li><b>"Bikeshedding"</b>: Discussions around specific stylistic rules (e.g., single vs. double quotes, space before colon) can sometimes lead to unproductive debates among team members.</li><li><b>False Positives</b>: Occasionally, complex CSS or non-standard syntax might trigger false positives that require disabling rules for specific lines or files.</li></ul>


title: CONFIGURATION FILES
content:
<b>stylelint</b> relies heavily on configuration files (e.g., <i>.stylelintrc.json</i>, <i>.stylelintrc.js</i>, or a <i>stylelint</i> field in <i>package.json</i>) to define rules, extend shared configurations, and specify processors. These files allow for granular control over linting behavior and enable projects to enforce unique coding standards tailored to specific requirements.


title: INTEGRATIONS
content:
Beyond the command line, <b>stylelint</b> integrates seamlessly with various development environments. It can be set up with build tools like <i>Webpack</i> or <i>Gulp</i>, used as a <i>PostCSS</i> plugin, or provide real-time feedback through editor plugins for <i>VS Code</i>, <i>Sublime Text</i>, and <i>Atom</i>, making linting an integral part of the development workflow and instantly highlighting style violations.


title: HISTORY
content:
<b>stylelint</b> emerged in the mid-2010s as a modern, extensible alternative to existing CSS linters, gaining rapid adoption within the frontend development community. It was designed from the ground up to be highly configurable, support a wide array of CSS-like syntaxes through PostCSS integration, and leverage a robust plugin ecosystem. Its focus on providing a clear AST for styling languages and its active community contributions have solidified its position as the de facto standard for CSS linting in contemporary web development, evolving to meet new language features and best practices.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>-c, --config [file]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies a custom configuration file for JSHint, overriding default or project-level configurations.<br><br><b>-e, --exclude [file]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Excludes specific files or directories from the linting process.<br><br><b>-r, --reporter [path]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Uses a custom reporter script to format the output of JSHint. This allows for integration with various tools or custom reporting formats.<br><br><b>--extract [value]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Controls how JavaScript code is extracted from non-JavaScript files (e.g., HTML). Possible values include 'always', 'auto', or 'never'.<br><br><b>--extra-ext [ext]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;A comma-separated list of additional file extensions (e.g., 'jsx,mjs') that JSHint should process as JavaScript.<br><br><b>--verbose</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Shows verbose output, providing more detailed information during the linting process, such as file paths being processed.<br><br><b>--prereqs</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays JSHint's prerequisites, typically showing the required Node.js version.<br><br><b>-v, --version</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays the installed version of JSHint.<br><br><b>-h, --help</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Shows the help message, listing all available command-line options and their usage.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
JSHint is a static code analysis tool specifically designed for JavaScript. It helps developers maintain code quality by scanning JavaScript code for errors, potential bugs, and adherence to coding style guidelines. Unlike traditional debuggers, JSHint performs its analysis without executing the code, making it a powerful pre-commit or pre-deployment check.<br><br>It's highly configurable through a `.jshintrc` file or command-line options, allowing teams to enforce specific coding standards and catch common pitfalls like undeclared variables, missing semicolons, or improper use of global objects. By integrating JSHint into a development workflow, developers can significantly reduce the number of quality issues and improve the consistency and readability of their JavaScript codebase.


title: CAVEATS
content:
JSHint requires Node.js to be installed on the system to run. While still functional, it has largely been superseded by more modern and flexible linters like ESLint in many contemporary JavaScript development environments, which offer a more extensive plugin ecosystem and finer-grained control. Configuration, especially with multiple `.jshintrc` files in a project, can sometimes be complex.


title: CONFIGURATION FILES (.JSHINTRC)
content:
JSHint primarily uses a configuration file named `.jshintrc` in the project root or subdirectory to define linting rules. These JSON-formatted files allow developers to enable/disable specific warnings, set global variables, and configure environments (e.g., browser, node). JSHint searches for `.jshintrc` files upwards through the directory tree, allowing for per-directory configurations.


title: EXIT CODES
content:
When run as a command-line tool, JSHint uses exit codes to indicate the result of the linting process:<br><i>0</i>: No errors or warnings were found.<br><i>1</i>: An error occurred (e.g., invalid configuration, file not found).<br><i>2</i>: Warnings were found in the analyzed code.<br><i>3</i>: Errors were found in the analyzed code.


title: HISTORY
content:
JSHint emerged as a fork of the original JSLint project in 2010. While JSLint was known for its highly opinionated and strict approach to JavaScript code quality, JSHint aimed to provide a more configurable and less opinionated alternative. The goal was to give developers more control over which rules to enforce, allowing them to tailor the linter to their specific project needs and coding styles, rather than adhering to a single, strict standard. This flexibility contributed to its widespread adoption in the JavaScript community for many years.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<i>htmlhint</i> [<i>options</i>] <<i>file</i>|<i>dir</i>|<i>glob ...</i>><br><i>htmlhint</i> [<i>options</i>] <b>--stdin</b><br><i>htmlhint</i> [<i>options</i>] <b>--code</b> <i>&lt;code&gt;</i>


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-h</b>, <b>--help</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display usage information and exit.<br><br><b><b>-V</b>, <b>--version</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Output the version number and exit.<br><br><b><b>--config</b> <i>&lt;file&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify an alternative configuration file to use (default is <i>.htmlhintrc</i>).<br><br><b><b>--rules</b> <i>&lt;ruleid,...&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify rules to enforce, as a comma-separated list of rule IDs.<br><br><b><b>--format</b> <i>&lt;formatter&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify the output formatter (e.g., <i>compact</i>, <i>html</i>, <i>json</i>, <i>checkstyle</i>).<br><br><b><b>--colorize</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Force colorization of output, even when stdout is not a TTY.<br><br><b><b>--no-color</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Disable colorization of output.<br><br><b><b>--stdin</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Read HTML content from standard input instead of files.<br><br><b><b>-c</b>, <b>--code</b> <i>&lt;code&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Lint an HTML string directly passed on the command line.<br><br><b><b>--ignore</b> <i>&lt;pattern&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify files or directories to ignore from linting, using glob patterns (e.g., "foo/**,bar/**").<br><br><b><b>--fail-on-hint</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Exit with a non-zero status code if any hints (warnings or errors) are found, useful for CI environments.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<b>htmlhint</b> is a powerful and flexible static code analysis tool designed to help developers identify and fix common errors, enforce coding standards, and improve the overall quality of HTML code. It can check for issues such as missing attributes, improper tag usage, accessibility concerns, and style guide violations.<br><br>By integrating <b>htmlhint</b> into development workflows, teams can ensure consistency, reduce bugs, and maintain clean, semantic HTML. It supports configuration through <i>.htmlhintrc</i> files, allowing for custom rule sets and the ability to ignore specific files or directories. <b>htmlhint</b> provides various output formats, making it suitable for both developer debugging and integration with continuous integration (CI) systems.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<b>htmlhint</b> primarily focuses on static analysis of HTML syntax and common structural issues. It does not execute JavaScript or render the page, so it cannot detect runtime errors or dynamic content issues.<br><br>While highly configurable, extensive customization of rules might require familiarity with its rule definitions. For large projects, careful use of <b>--ignore</b> patterns is recommended to avoid linting generated or third-party HTML.


title: CONFIGURATION FILES (<I>.HTMLHINTRC</I>)
content:
<b>htmlhint</b> supports <i>.htmlhintrc</i> files, typically in JSON format, to define linting rules and their severity (error, warning, off). These files can be placed in project root directories or subdirectories to apply specific configurations, allowing for hierarchical rule management.


title: RULE CUSTOMIZATION
content:
Users can enable, disable, or configure individual rules (e.g., `tag-pair`, `id-unique`) within the <i>.htmlhintrc</i> file or via the <b>--rules</b> command-line option. This flexibility allows for highly tailored linting experiences to match specific project requirements or company style guides.


title: HISTORY
content:
<b>htmlhint</b> emerged from the need for a dedicated HTML linter in the web development ecosystem, similar to <i>JSHint</i> (a predecessor to <i>ESLint</i>) for JavaScript. It was created to provide static analysis for HTML files, helping developers catch common mistakes and enforce coding standards.<br><br>Its development reflects the growing emphasis on code quality and consistency in front-end development, becoming a popular tool for ensuring well-formed and maintainable HTML across various projects and teams.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-h</b>, <b>--help</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Show a help message and exit.<br><br><b><b>-n</b> <i>COLUMN_NAME</i>, <b>--column-name</b> <i>COLUMN_NAME</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify the name for the new 'source' column added to the output. Defaults to 'source'.<br><br><b><b>-g</b> <i>GROUP_BY</i>, <b>--group-by</b> <i>GROUP_BY</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Instead of creating a new 'source' column, use an existing column (or a comma-separated list of columns) to identify groups. Input files must contain these columns.<br><br><b><b>-i</b>, <b>--no-inference</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Disable type inference when parsing input data. All data will be treated as strings.<br><br><b><b>-I</b> <i>SKIP_LINES</i>, <b>--skip-lines</b> <i>SKIP_LINES</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Skip the specified number of initial lines in each input file before processing, useful for skipping comments or metadata.<br><br><b><b>-d</b> <i>DELIMITER</i>, <b>--delimiter</b> <i>DELIMITER</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify the character used to delimit fields in the input CSV files. Defaults to a comma.<br><br><b><b>-t</b>, <b>--tabs</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify that the input files are tab-separated (TSV) instead of comma-separated.<br><br><b><b>-q</b> <i>QUOTECHAR</i>, <b>--quotechar</b> <i>QUOTECHAR</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify the character used to quote fields containing special characters. Defaults to a double quote (").<br><br><b><b>-u</b> <i>ESCAPECHAR</i>, <b>--escapechar</b> <i>ESCAPECHAR</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify the character used to escape the `QUOTECHAR` within a quoted field.<br><br><b><b>-p</b> <i>PARSE_DATES</i>, <b>--parse-dates</b> <i>PARSE_DATES</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;A comma-separated list of column names to parse as dates.<br><br><b><b>-l</b> <i>WHITELIST</i>, <b>--parse-dimensional-whitelist</b> <i>WHITELIST</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;A comma-separated list of column names that are considered 'dimensional' and always parsed. (Advanced option for `agate` integration).<br><br><b><b>-e</b> <i>ENCODING</i>, <b>--encoding</b> <i>ENCODING</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify the character encoding of the input files. Defaults to UTF-8.<br><br><b><b>-z</b>, <b>--gzip</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Decompress gzipped input files automatically.<br><br><b><b>-b</b>, <b>--bz2</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Decompress bzip2 input files automatically.<br><br><b><b>--zero</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Output zeros instead of empty strings for missing numeric values.<br><br><b><b>--blanks</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Do not convert empty strings to `null` values; treat them as actual empty strings.<br><br><b><b>--no-header-row</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Treat the first row of each input file as data, not as a header row. Assumes consistent column order.<br><br><b><b>--snifflimit</b> <i>SNIFFLIMIT</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Limit the number of rows to sniff for column types. Defaults to 1024.<br><br><b><b>-v</b>, <b>--verbose</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Print extra information and progress messages to stderr.<br><br><b><b>-W</b>, <b>--skip-errors</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Skip rows that cannot be parsed successfully, continuing processing.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>csvstack</i> is a powerful command-line utility from the <i>csvkit</i> suite designed to <b>vertically concatenate multiple CSV files into a single, cohesive dataset</b>. Its primary feature is the ability to add a new column, by default named 'source', to the combined output. This new column clearly indicates which original input file each row originated from, preserving data provenance.<br><br>The command efficiently handles different column sets across input files by taking the union of all column names. For any column not present in a particular input file, <i>csvstack</i> will fill the corresponding cells with `null` values (or blanks/zeros depending on options). This makes it invaluable for consolidating data from various sources with potentially inconsistent schemas, allowing for unified analysis without losing track of the original context. It's an essential tool for data aggregation and preparation workflows.


title: CAVEATS
content:
When combining files with differing column sets, <i>csvstack</i> will create a union of all column names. Columns present in some files but not others will be padded with empty values (or `null`, zeros, or blanks depending on options) in the output. While <i>csvstack</i> attempts intelligent type inference, inconsistencies in data types for the same column across different input files might lead to unexpected type coercion. For large numbers of files or extremely large individual files, performance can be a consideration as all data must be read and processed.


title: COLUMN ALIGNMENT
content:
<i>csvstack</i> intelligently handles input files with different header rows. It constructs a 'master' header by taking the union of all unique column names from all input files. When processing each file, it aligns its data to this master header. If an input file lacks a column present in another, that column's values will be `null` (or empty strings/zeros based on options) for rows from that specific file in the final output.


title: OUTPUT REDIRECTION
content:
By default, <i>csvstack</i> writes its combined output to standard output (`stdout`). To save the result to a new file, you should redirect the output using your shell's redirection operator, for example: `csvstack file1.csv file2.csv > combined.csv`.


title: HISTORY
content:
<i>csvstack</i> is a component of <i>csvkit</i>, a collection of utilities for working with CSV files from the command line, developed by Christopher Groskopf. <i>csvkit</i> was created to provide a robust, Python-based alternative to traditional shell scripting for common CSV manipulation tasks, drawing inspiration from tools like <i>jq</i> for JSON. Its development aimed to simplify and standardize operations like stacking, joining, and filtering CSV data, making it a popular choice for data scientists and analysts in modern data workflows.


title: SEE ALSO
content:
<b>csvjoin(1)</b>: Joins CSV files horizontally based on common key columns., <b>csvcut(1)</b>: Selects, reorders, or removes columns from CSV files., <b>csvsort(1)</b>: Sorts CSV files by one or more columns., <b>cat(1)</b>: A basic Unix command for concatenating files, but does not handle CSV headers or add source columns., <b>awk(1)</b> / <b>sed(1)</b>: General-purpose text processing tools that can perform similar tasks with more complex scripting.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>FILE</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<I>The path to the input CSV file. If omitted, <b>csvjson</b> reads CSV data from standard input (stdin).</I><br><br><b><b>-h</b>, <b>--help</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<I>Display a help message for <b>csvjson</b> and exit.</I><br><br><b><b>-d DELIMITER</b>, <b>--delimiter DELIMITER</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<I>Specify the field delimiter character used in the input CSV file. Defaults to a comma (,).</I><br><br><b><b>-t</b>, <b>--tabs</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<I>Treat the input CSV file as tab-delimited. This is a shorthand for `<b>--delimiter '\t'</b>`.</I><br><br><b><b>-q QUOTECHAR</b>, <b>--quote-character QUOTECHAR</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<I>Define the character used to quote fields containing special characters like delimiters or newlines. Defaults to a double quote (").</I><br><br><b><b>-u {0,1,2,3}</b>, <b>--quoting {0,1,2,3}</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<I>Control the quoting behavior for output fields. Refer to the Python `csv` module documentation for the meaning of values 0-3.</I><br><br><b><b>-b</b>, <b>--doublequote</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<I>Instructs the CSV parser to interpret two consecutive quote characters within a quoted field as a single, escaped quote character.</I><br><br><b><b>-p</b>, <b>--no-skip-initial-space</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<I>By default, spaces immediately following the delimiter are skipped. This option disables that behavior, treating leading spaces as part of the field content.</I><br><br><b><b>-z ESCAPECHAR</b>, <b>--escapechar ESCAPECHAR</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<I>Specify a character that is used to escape the delimiter or quote character within fields.</I><br><br><b><b>-e ENCODING</b>, <b>--encoding ENCODING</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<I>Set the character encoding of the input CSV file, e.g., 'utf-8'.</I><br><br><b><b>-L LOCALE</b>, <b>--locale LOCALE</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<I>Specify the locale to use for parsing numbers and dates in the input CSV.</I><br><br><b><b>-S</b>, <b>--skip-initial-space</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<I>Skip spaces immediately following the delimiter. This is the default behavior; the `<b>-p</b>` option disables it.</I><br><br><b><b>--blanks</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<I>Do not convert empty strings in the CSV to `null` values in the JSON output; instead, treat them as literal empty strings.</I><br><br><b><b>--no-inference</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<I>Disable automatic type inference. All CSV fields will be treated as strings in the JSON output, potentially speeding up processing for large files.</I><br><br><b><b>--zero-pad-float</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<I>When converting floating-point numbers, ensure they are zero-padded to maintain precision.</I><br><br><b><b>--skip-lines SKIP_LINES</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<I>Specify the number of lines to skip at the beginning of the input file before parsing the header or data rows.</I><br><br><b><b>--date-format DATE_FORMAT</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<I>Provide a `strftime` format string (e.g., '%Y-%m-%d') to use when parsing date columns.</I><br><br><b><b>--datetime-format DATETIME_FORMAT</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<I>Provide a `strftime` format string to use when parsing datetime columns.</I><br><br><b><b>--null-value NULL_VALUE</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<I>Specify a string value in the CSV that should be interpreted as `null` in the output JSON. Defaults to empty strings.</I><br><br><b><b>-H</b>, <b>--no-header-row</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<I>Treat the first row of the CSV as a data row rather than a header row. Columns will be referenced by numerical index (0-based).</I><br><br><b><b>-K KEY</b>, <b>--key KEY</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<I>Use the values from the specified column as keys in a JSON object, instead of outputting an array. This option requires `<b>--enumerate</b>`.</I><br><br><b><b>--snifflimit SNIFFLIMIT</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<I>Limit the number of rows `<b>csvjson</b>` sniffs from the input to infer column types. Defaults to 1024 rows.</I><br><br><b><b>--names</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<I>Output only a single JSON array containing the column names (header row) and then exit.</I><br><br><b><b>-c COLUMNS</b>, <b>--columns COLUMNS</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<I>A comma-separated list of column names or 0-based indices (e.g., '1,colB,3') to include in the output. Only specified columns will be processed.</I><br><br><b><b>-C COLUMNS</b>, <b>--exclude-columns COLUMNS</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<I>A comma-separated list of column names or 0-based indices to exclude from the output. All other columns will be included.</I><br><br><b><b>-o OUTPUT_PATH</b>, <b>--output OUTPUT_PATH</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<I>Specify the path to an output file where the JSON results will be written. If omitted, output is sent to standard output (stdout).</I><br><br><b><b>--pretty</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<I>Format the JSON output with indentation and newlines, making it more human-readable. Equivalent to `<b>--indent 2</b>`.</I><br><br><b><b>--indent INDENT</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<I>Specify the number of spaces to indent pretty-printed JSON output. Implies `<b>--pretty</b>` if not already set.</I><br><br><b><b>--enumerate</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<I>Output an array of JSON objects, where each object represents a row. This option is required when using the `<b>--key</b>` option.</I><br><br><b><b>--stream</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<I>Output JSON objects one per line (Newline Delimited JSON, NDJSON). This is suitable for processing very large datasets without holding the entire JSON structure in memory.</I><br><br><b><b>--format {array,objects,ndjson}</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<I>Specify the desired output JSON structure: `<b>array</b>` (an array of arrays), `<b>objects</b>` (an array of objects, the default), or `<b>ndjson</b>` (newline-delimited JSON objects).</I><br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <b>csvjson</b> command is a powerful utility from the <b>csvkit</b> suite designed for converting Comma Separated Values (CSV) data into JavaScript Object Notation (JSON) format.<br><br>It processes CSV input, which can be provided via standard input or from a specified file, and outputs JSON to standard output or an output file. By default, <b>csvjson</b> infers data types (e.g., integers, floats, booleans, dates) for each column and represents each CSV row as a JSON object within a larger JSON array. It supports various options for controlling input parsing (delimiters, quoting, encoding), column selection, and output formatting (pretty printing, indentation, different JSON structures like arrays of arrays or newline-delimited JSON).<br><br><b>csvjson</b> is particularly useful in data processing pipelines, allowing for seamless integration of CSV data with applications and services that consume JSON, such as web APIs, NoSQL databases, or JavaScript frontends. Its flexibility makes it an essential tool for data engineers, analysts, and developers working with structured text data.


title: CAVEATS
content:
When processing very large CSV files, especially without `<b>--no-inference</b>`, <b>csvjson</b> can consume significant memory as it attempts to infer types and construct the JSON output. Using `<b>--stream</b>` or `<b>--format ndjson</b>` is highly recommended for large datasets to reduce memory footprint by outputting line-by-line.<br><br>Automatic type inference might not always correctly identify the desired data type for all columns, particularly for mixed-type columns or ambiguous date/datetime formats. In such cases, explicitly disabling inference with `<b>--no-inference</b>` or providing `<b>--date-format</b>`/`<b>--datetime-format</b>` can be necessary.<br><br>The `<b>--key</b>` option requires careful use with `<b>--enumerate</b>` and is designed for specific JSON output structures, not general conversion.


title: PART OF CSVKIT
content:
<b>csvjson</b> is one of several specialized tools included in the <I>csvkit</I> collection, a comprehensive set of command-line utilities for working with CSV files. Other tools in the suite include `<b>csvcut</b>` for column selection, `<b>csvgrep</b>` for row filtering, and `<b>csvstat</b>` for statistical analysis, all designed to integrate seamlessly within shell scripts and data workflows.


title: USE IN DATA PIPELINES
content:
Due to its command-line nature and support for standard input/output, <b>csvjson</b> is ideal for use in data processing pipelines. It can easily be chained with other Unix commands (e.g., `<b>cat input.csv | csvjson | jq '.'</b>`) for complex transformations, making it a flexible component in ETL (Extract, Transform, Load) processes or data analysis workflows.


title: HISTORY
content:
<b>csvjson</b> is part of the <I>csvkit</I> suite of utilities, an open-source project initiated by Christopher Groskopf around 2012. <I>csvkit</I> was developed to provide powerful, command-line tools for working with CSV files, leveraging Python's robust `csv` module. Its development focused on making data manipulation and transformation accessible through standard Unix-like pipes and commands, enhancing productivity for data professionals. <b>csvjson</b> specifically addresses the common need to bridge between CSV and JSON data formats in modern data pipelines.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>-h, --help</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Show help message and exit.<br><br><b>-d DELIMITER, --delimiter DELIMITER</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The delimiting character of the input CSV files.<br><br><b>-t, --tabs</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify that the input CSV file is tab-separated.<br><br><b>-q QUOTECHAR, --quotechar QUOTECHAR</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Character used to quote fields in the input CSV files.<br><br><b>-u {0,1,2,3}, --quoting {0,1,2,3}</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Control quoting behavior. 0=QUOTE_MINIMAL, 1=QUOTE_ALL, 2=QUOTE_NONNUMERIC, 3=QUOTE_NONE.<br><br><b>-b, --doublequote</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Treat double quotes as delimiters.<br><br><b>-p ESCAPECHAR, --escapechar ESCAPECHAR</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Character used to escape the delimiter if --quoting 3 is used.<br><br><b>-z FIELD_SIZE_LIMIT, --field-size-limit FIELD_SIZE_LIMIT</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Maximum length of a field in the input CSV files.<br><br><b>-e ENCODING, --encoding ENCODING</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify the encoding of the input CSV files.<br><br><b>-L LOCALE, --locale LOCALE</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify the locale of the input CSV files.<br><br><b>-S, --skipinitialspace</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Skip spaces immediately following the delimiter.<br><br><b>--skip-header</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Skip the first line of the input CSV files. Useful if the header is not a header but part of the data.<br><br><b>--no-header-row</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify that the input CSV files do not have header rows.<br><br><b>--snifflimit SNIFFLIMIT</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Limit CSV dialect sniffing to the specified number of bytes.<br><br><b>--no-inference</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Disable type inference when parsing CSV files, treating all data as strings.<br><br><b>--zero</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enable zero-based column indexing instead of one-based.<br><br><b>-v, --verbose</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Print more information to stderr during execution.<br><br><b>-H, --linenumbers</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Output line numbers as a new column.<br><br><b>-V, --version</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Show program's version number and exit.<br><br><b>-c COLUMNS, --columns COLUMNS</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;A comma-separated list of column names or 1-based indices to join on. When joining more than two files, the columns apply sequentially (e.g., first column for FILE1-FILE2, second for (FILE1+FILE2)-FILE3).<br><br><b>--left</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Perform a left outer join. Returns all rows from the left file, and matched rows from the right.<br><br><b>--outer</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Perform a full outer join. Returns all rows when there is a match in either file.<br><br><b>--inner</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Perform an inner join (<i>default</i>). Returns rows only when there is a match in both files.<br><br><b>--right</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Perform a right outer join. Returns all rows from the right file, and matched rows from the left.<br><br><b>--keep-extra-columns</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Keep extra columns from the right-hand file(s) even if they have the same name as columns in the left-hand file(s). Duplicate names will be prefixed.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<b>csvjoin</b> is a powerful command-line utility from the <i>csvkit</i> suite that enables users to perform SQL-style join operations on two or more CSV files. It merges rows from multiple CSVs based on common column values, acting much like a relational database system but directly on flat files.<br><br>Users can specify the columns to join on, choose different join types (inner, outer, left, right), and handle files with or without header rows. This tool simplifies complex data integration tasks, making it accessible to data analysts and developers working with CSV data on the command line. It's particularly useful for combining datasets from various sources into a unified view for further analysis or reporting.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<b>Performance and Memory:</b> For extremely large CSV files, <b>csvjoin</b> can be memory-intensive as it often loads files into memory for processing. This can become a bottleneck, potentially impacting performance or causing out-of-memory errors.<br><br><b>Column Name Conflicts:</b> By default, <b>csvjoin</b> will drop columns with duplicate names from subsequent files unless <code>--keep-extra-columns</code> is used. When used, duplicate column names from the right-hand file(s) will be prefixed to ensure uniqueness (e.g., <code>FILE2_column_name</code>). Users must be mindful of naming conventions or use this flag carefully.<br><br><b>Strict Key Matching:</b> Joins require exact matches on specified key columns. Differences in case, leading/trailing spaces, or variations in data types (if not handled by <b>csvkit</b>'s inference or explicit settings) will prevent matches and lead to missing data in the joined output.


title: JOIN TYPES EXPLAINED
content:
<b>csvjoin</b> supports several types of SQL-style joins, allowing flexible data merging:<br><br><i>Inner Join</i> (default): Returns rows only when there is a match in the join columns of <i>both</i> CSV files. Non-matching rows from either file are excluded.<br><br><i>Left Outer Join</i> (<code>--left</code>): Returns all rows from the 'left' (first specified) CSV file, and the matched rows from the 'right' (subsequent) CSV file. If there is no match in the right CSV, <code>NULL</code> (empty) values are used for columns from the right file.<br><br><i>Right Outer Join</i> (<code>--right</code>): Returns all rows from the 'right' (subsequent) CSV file, and the matched rows from the 'left' (first specified) CSV file. If there is no match in the left CSV, <code>NULL</code> (empty) values are used for columns from the left file.<br><br><i>Full Outer Join</i> (<code>--outer</code>): Returns all rows when there is a match in one of the CSV files. If there is no match for a row in either the left or right file, <code>NULL</code> (empty) values are used for the columns from the non-matching file.


title: HISTORY
content:
<b>csvjoin</b> is an integral part of the <i>csvkit</i> suite of command-line tools, a project originally conceived and developed by Christopher Groskopf. The initiative for <i>csvkit</i> began around 2011 with a clear objective: to provide an easy-to-use, powerful, and Unix-philosophy-compliant set of utilities specifically designed for manipulating CSV data.<br><br>The development of <i>csvkit</i> and <b>csvjoin</b> was driven by a recognized need to bridge the gap between basic Unix text processing tools (such as <b>cut</b>, <b>sort</b>, and the traditional <b>join</b> command) and more complex database or scripting solutions. It offers SQL-like capabilities directly on flat CSV files, making sophisticated data wrangling tasks accessible to data analysts, journalists, and developers who work extensively with CSV data on the command line. Its ongoing development reflects a commitment to providing robust and user-friendly tools in an era where CSV remains a ubiquitous data format.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>-v</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<I>Verbose mode</I>. Displays diagnostic information during connection setup.<br><br><b>-8</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<I>8-bit clean</I>. Forces the connection to use 8-bit characters, disabling parity checking.<br><br><b>-speed <baud_rate></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<I>Set baud rate</I>. Specifies the initial transmission speed (e.g., 9600, 115200) for the connection. This overrides any speed set in the /etc/remote entry or default settings.<br><br><b>-l <line></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<I>Local TTY line</I>. Specifies the local TTY device to use for the connection (e.g., /dev/ttyS0). This is used when connecting directly to a serial port.<br><br><b>-h <host></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<I>Remote host</I>. Forces <b>tip</b> to interpret the argument as a host entry from /etc/remote, even if it might otherwise be interpreted as a device path.<br><br><b>-disconnect-on-exit</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<I>Hang up on exit</I>. Causes <b>tip</b> to assert DTR (Data Terminal Ready) to hang up the modem when the connection is terminated. Useful for ensuring the remote modem drops the line.<br><br><b>-hwflow</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<I>Hardware flow control</I>. Enables RTS/CTS hardware flow control for the serial connection, preventing data loss by signaling when buffers are full.<br><br><b>-softflow</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<I>Software flow control</I>. Enables XON/XOFF software flow control for the serial connection, using special characters to pause and resume data transmission.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<b>tip</b> is a command-line utility for establishing a terminal connection to a remote system, typically over a serial communication line or, historically, a network connection. It acts as a transparent interface, allowing users to interact with the connected system as if directly attached. Commonly used for accessing console ports of routers, switches, servers, or modems, <b>tip</b> provides a flexible way to manage devices that don't yet have network connectivity or require out-of-band management. It supports various serial port configurations (baud rate, parity) and offers escape sequences (e.g., <I>~.</I>, <I>~#</I>, <I>~c</I>) for control actions like disconnecting, sending a break, or changing parameters on the fly. While modern network protocols like SSH have largely replaced <b>tip</b> for general remote access, it remains an invaluable tool for direct hardware interaction and debugging legacy systems.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<b>Security:</b> <b>tip</b> itself does not provide encryption for network connections, making it unsuitable for secure remote access over untrusted networks.<br><br><b>Configuration:</b> Relies heavily on the <I>/etc/remote</I> file for host definitions, which can be complex to set up and maintain for multiple remote systems.<br><br><b>Legacy:</b> While still functional, it is less feature-rich and user-friendly compared to modern terminal emulators or SSH clients.<br><br><b>Device Permissions:</b> Requires appropriate read/write permissions for serial devices (e.g., /dev/ttyS0), often requiring root privileges or membership in a specific group (like <I>dialout</I>).


title: ESCAPE SEQUENCES
content:
During an active <b>tip</b> session, special escape sequences are used to control the program itself, rather than sending input to the remote system. These sequences always start with a tilde (<I>~</I>) character at the beginning of a line.<br><br><b>~.</b>: <I>Disconnect</I>. Terminates the <b>tip</b> session and closes the connection.<br><b>~#</b>: <I>Send break</I>. Sends a BREAK signal to the remote system. This is often used to interrupt processes, reset devices, or enter a bootloader/monitor mode.<br><b>~c &lt;command&gt;</b>: <I>Local command</I>. Executes a command on the local system, allowing you to run shell commands without exiting <b>tip</b>.<br><b>~s &lt;variable&gt;=&lt;value&gt;</b>: <I>Set variable</I>. Modifies internal <b>tip</b> variables. For example, <I>~s baud=115200</I> changes the connection speed.<br><b>~p &lt;local_file&gt; &lt;remote_file&gt;</b>: <I>Put file</I>. Sends a local file to the remote system. This often requires a cooperating program on the remote side to receive the file.<br><b>~t &lt;remote_file&gt; &lt;local_file&gt;</b>: <I>Take file</I>. Receives a file from the remote system. Similar to 'put', this requires remote side cooperation.<br><b>~?</b>: <I>Help</I>. Displays a list of all available escape sequences.


title: HISTORY
content:
<b>tip</b> originated in Berkeley Unix (BSD) in the late 1970s/early 1980s. It was designed as a simple yet powerful tool for interacting with modems and other serial devices, and for connecting to other Unix systems via dial-up lines. It became a standard utility in BSD-derived systems and was later ported to Linux and other Unix-like operating systems as part of the <I>bsdutils</I> or similar packages. While its primary use case for inter-system communication has been largely superseded by network protocols like TCP/IP and applications like SSH, its core functionality for direct serial port interaction remains relevant for specific hardware management and debugging tasks, especially in embedded systems or networking equipment.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>uucp</b> [<i>options</i>] <i>source-file</i>... <i>destination-file</i><br><b>uucp</b> [-c | -C] [-d | -f] [-g <i>grade</i>] [-j] [-m] [-n <i>user</i>] [-r] [-s <i>file</i>] [-x <i>debug_level</i>] <i>source</i> ... <i>destination</i>


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>-c</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Do not copy local source files to the spool directory, but stream them directly to <b>uucico</b>. This option saves disk space but may fail if the local file is modified before transfer.<br><br><b>-C</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Force the copying of local source files to the spool directory before transfer. This is often the default behavior and ensures consistency during transfer.<br><br><b>-d</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Create all necessary intermediate directories on the remote system for the <i>destination-file</i> if they do not already exist.<br><br><b>-f</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Do not create any intermediate directories on the remote system. If the required directories do not exist, an error will be reported.<br><br><b>-g <i>grade</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Assign a specific <i>grade</i> (priority) to the job. Lower grades (e.g., 'A') are transferred first. The default grade is typically 'C'.<br><br><b>-j</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Print the UUCP job ID (job number) on standard output after the transfer request has been spooled.<br><br><b>-m</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Send mail to the requesting user upon successful completion or failure of the transfer of the <i>source-file</i>.<br><br><b>-n <i>user</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Notify the specified <i>user</i> on the remote system via mail that the file has arrived.<br><br><b>-r</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Queue the job for transfer but do not start the transfer program (<b>uucico</b>) immediately. The transfer will be initiated later by a scheduled <b>uucico</b> run.<br><br><b>-s <i>file</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Report the status of the transfer to the specified local <i>file</i> instead of sending mail.<br><br><b>-x <i>debug_level</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Turn on debugging output to standard error, with <i>debug_level</i> controlling the verbosity (typically 0-9).<br><br><b><i>source-file</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The path to the source file. This can be a local file path or a remote file specified as `<i>system!path</i>`.<br><br><b><i>destination-file</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The path to the destination. This can be a local file path or a remote location specified as `<i>system!path</i>`.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <b>uucp</b> (Unix-to-Unix Copy) command is a foundational utility from the UUCP suite, designed for transferring files between different Unix-like machines. It allows users to copy files to or from remote systems, often leveraging dial-up modems, serial connections, or early network protocols. Unlike modern tools that perform immediate transfers, <b>uucp</b> typically spools transfer requests, queuing them for later execution by the <b>uucico</b> daemon. This asynchronous approach was crucial in environments with intermittent connectivity. Users specify remote file paths using a 'system!path' notation. While largely superseded by more secure and efficient protocols like <b>scp</b> and <b>rsync</b> for modern internet usage, <b>uucp</b> played a pivotal role in early internetworking, the spread of Usenet, and the general interconnectedness of Unix systems before the widespread adoption of TCP/IP.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<b>uucp</b> is an older protocol with several limitations compared to modern file transfer methods. It often lacks strong encryption, making it less secure for sensitive data transfers over untrusted networks. Its configuration can be complex, involving multiple configuration files and daemons, which can be challenging to manage. Furthermore, error handling and status reporting can be less user-friendly than contemporary tools. For most modern use cases, more secure and efficient alternatives like <b>scp</b> or <b>rsync</b> are highly recommended. Interoperability with non-UUCP systems is also limited.


title: REMOTE PATHNAMES
content:
<b>uucp</b> uses a specific syntax for referring to remote files. A remote system is typically specified by prefixing the filename with the system's name and an exclamation mark, like `<i>system!/path/to/file</i>`. A path starting with `~<i>user</i>/` (e.g., `<i>system!~user/file</i>`) refers to a file within the specified user's home directory on the remote system. A `!/` (e.g., `<i>!/path/to/file</i>`) can refer to a local path with an absolute path, useful when distinguishing local and remote systems in complex scripts. This notation allows flexible specification of file locations across the UUCP network.


title: JOB SPOOLING
content:
A key characteristic of <b>uucp</b> is its asynchronous operation through job spooling. When a <b>uucp</b> command is executed, it typically doesn't perform the transfer immediately. Instead, it creates a job entry (control file, data files) in a local spool directory. The actual transfer is then handled by the <b>uucico</b> daemon, which periodically checks the spool directory for pending jobs and initiates connections to remote systems to exchange data. This mechanism was essential for handling intermittent network connectivity and batch processing, allowing transfers to happen efficiently during off-peak hours or when connections became available.


title: HISTORY
content:
Developed at Bell Labs in 1976 by Mike Lesk, Dave Farber, and Joe Ossanna, <b>uucp</b> emerged as a groundbreaking utility for connecting disparate Unix systems. It became the backbone for early Wide Area Networks (WANs), facilitating the exchange of email, files, and newsgroup articles (Usenet) long before the internet became mainstream. Its design focused on robustness over unreliable, slow connections, often dial-up modems. While its primary role diminished with the rise of TCP/IP and the internet in the late 1980s and 1990s, the UUCP suite left an indelible mark on network computing, pioneering many concepts of asynchronous communication and distributed systems.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-a</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Forces the output path to be an absolute path. This option ensures that the converted path is fully qualified, rather than relative.<br><br><b><b>-u</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Converts the given Windows path to a WSL (Linux) format path. For example, <code>C:\Users\file.txt</code> becomes <code>/mnt/c/Users/file.txt</code>.<br><br><b><b>-w</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Converts the given WSL (Linux) path to a Windows format path using backslashes. For example, <code>/mnt/c/Users/file.txt</code> becomes <code>C:\Users\file.txt</code>.<br><br><b><b>-m</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Converts the given WSL (Linux) path to a Windows format path using mixed slashes (forward slashes for directories, backslashes for drive letters). For example, <code>/mnt/c/Users/file.txt</code> becomes <code>C:/Users/file.txt</code>. This can be useful for applications that expect Windows paths but are more tolerant of forward slashes.<br><br><b><i>&lt;path&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The path to be converted. This can be either a Windows path or a WSL/Linux path, depending on the conversion option used.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>wslpath</i> is a command-line utility integral to the Windows Subsystem for Linux (WSL), designed to facilitate seamless interoperability between Linux and Windows file systems. Its primary function is to translate file paths from a WSL/Linux format to a Windows-compatible format, and vice-versa. This is crucial for scripts and applications that need to interact across both environments, allowing users to specify paths in a way that the target operating system can understand.<br><br>For instance, a Linux path like <code>/home/user/document.txt</code> might be converted to <code>\\wsl$\Ubuntu\home\user\document.txt</code> (for WSL2 shares) or <code>C:\path\to\file.txt</code> if it's on a mounted Windows drive. Conversely, a Windows path such as <code>C:\Users\user\Desktop</code> can be transformed into its Linux equivalent, typically <code>/mnt/c/Users/user/Desktop</code>. This utility is indispensable for bridging the gap between the distinct path conventions of Linux and Windows, making cross-platform scripting and tool integration significantly smoother.


title: CAVEATS
content:
When converting between environments, <i>wslpath</i> relies on the mounted file system structure. Windows drives are typically mounted under <code>/mnt/</code> in WSL (e.g., <code>C:</code> becomes <code>/mnt/c</code>).<br><br>While highly effective, complex network paths (UNC paths) or paths containing special characters might sometimes require careful handling or specific formatting. For WSL2, Linux file paths (e.g., <code>/home/user</code>) are often exposed to Windows via a 9P protocol share, accessible as <code>\\wsl$\<i>&lt;distro_name&gt;</i></code>, which <i>wslpath</i> can also translate.


title: UNC PATH SUPPORT
content:
<i>wslpath</i> is capable of handling Universal Naming Convention (UNC) paths for network shares. This means it can convert Windows UNC paths like <code>\\server\share\folder</code> to their WSL equivalent, such as <code>/mnt/unc/server/share/folder</code>, and vice-versa. This feature is particularly valuable for integrating WSL environments into corporate networks or working with shared resources.


title: SCRIPTING UTILITY
content:
One of the most common and powerful uses of <i>wslpath</i> is within shell scripts. It allows scripts running in the WSL environment to correctly reference files on Windows drives or pass Windows-formatted paths to native Windows applications, and similarly, enable Windows scripts to interact with files within the WSL filesystem. This ensures that command-line tools and utilities can operate without manual path adjustments, streamlining complex automation tasks.


title: HISTORY
content:
The <i>wslpath</i> utility was introduced early in the development of the Windows Subsystem for Linux to address a fundamental challenge: enabling seamless interaction between the distinctly different file system path conventions of Linux and Windows. As WSL evolved, particularly with the introduction of WSL2 and its more integrated architecture, <i>wslpath</i> remained a critical tool for explicit path conversions, supporting scripting and cross-environment workflows. Its consistent functionality underscores its importance in the WSL ecosystem, bridging the gap for developers and users working across both OS environments.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>sqlcmd</b> [<i>-S server_name</i>] [<i>-U username</i>] [<i>-P password</i> | <i>-E</i> | <i>-G</i>] [<i>-d database_name</i>]<br>          [<i>-Q "query"</i> | <i>-q "query"</i> | <i>-i input_file</i>] [<i>-o output_file</i>]<br>          [<i>-V var=value</i>] [<i>-W</i>] [<i>-s separator</i>] [<i>other_options</i>]<br><br><i>Description:</i><br><b>sqlcmd</b> connects to SQL Server and executes T-SQL statements or scripts. Options like <i>-S</i>, <i>-U</i>, <i>-P</i> specify connection details, while <i>-Q</i>, <i>-q</i>, or <i>-i</i> define the T-SQL to execute. Results can be redirected using <i>-o</i>.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-S</b> <i>server_name</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the SQL Server instance to connect to. Can be hostname, IP, or named instance.<br><br><b><b>-d</b> <i>database_name</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the initial database to connect to upon login.<br><br><b><b>-U</b> <i>username</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the user name (login ID) to use for SQL Server Authentication.<br><br><b><b>-P</b> <i>password</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the password for the specified <b>-U</b> username.<br><br><b><b>-E</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Uses trusted connection (Windows Authentication). On Linux, this typically requires Kerberos configuration for domain authentication.<br><br><b><b>-G</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Uses Azure Active Directory (AAD) authentication. Essential for connecting to Azure SQL Database/Synapse Analytics with AAD identities.<br><br><b><b>-Q</b> <i>"query"</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Executes a query or stored procedure and then immediately exits <b>sqlcmd</b>.<br><br><b><b>-q</b> <i>"query"</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Executes a query or stored procedure, but remains at the <b>sqlcmd</b> prompt after execution.<br><br><b><b>-i</b> <i>input_file</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the input file containing T-SQL statements or <b>sqlcmd</b> commands to execute.<br><br><b><b>-o</b> <i>output_file</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the file to which all output from <b>sqlcmd</b> is written, including results, messages, and errors.<br><br><b><b>-l</b> <i>timeout</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the login timeout in seconds before <b>sqlcmd</b> times out when attempting to connect to a server.<br><br><b><b>-W</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Removes trailing spaces from query output. By default, trailing spaces are preserved for display.<br><br><b><b>-s</b> <i>col_separator</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the column separator character to use in the output. Default is a space.<br><br><b><b>-V</b> <i>variable=value</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets a <b>sqlcmd</b> scripting variable that can be referenced within scripts using <i>$(VARIABLE)</i>.<br><br><b><b>-X</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Disables commands and variables that could compromise system security, enhancing safety for untrusted scripts.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<b>sqlcmd</b> is a powerful command-line utility designed for interacting with Microsoft SQL Server, Azure SQL Database, and Azure Synapse Analytics instances. Available on Linux, it provides a robust interface for executing Transact-SQL (T-SQL) statements, stored procedures, and entire SQL scripts directly from the terminal. <br><br>This versatile tool is essential for database administrators and developers working in mixed-OS environments, enabling them to perform a wide array of tasks such as database administration, automated script deployments, data imports/exports, and ad-hoc querying. <b>sqlcmd</b> supports various authentication methods, including SQL Server Authentication and Azure Active Directory (AAD) authentication, making it adaptable to different security configurations. <br><br>Key features include the ability to define and use scripting variables, format output in different styles, and handle errors effectively, making it suitable for both interactive use and integration into shell scripts for automation. Its presence on Linux extends the reach of SQL Server management to a broader set of operating systems.


title: CAVEATS
content:
When using <b>sqlcmd</b> on Linux, note that some features available on Windows, such as the Dedicated Administrator Connection (DAC) or integrated Windows Authentication without Kerberos, may not be fully supported or behave identically. <br><br>Specifically, the <b>-E</b> option for trusted connections often requires a correctly configured Kerberos environment on the Linux machine to function. <br><br>For Azure SQL Database and Azure Synapse Analytics, the <b>-G</b> option for Azure Active Directory authentication is crucial and may require specific ODBC driver installations (e.g., `msodbcsql17`) and configurations. <br><br>Care should be taken with output formatting, especially when parsing results in scripts, as default spacing and headers can be verbose. For bulk data operations, tools like <b>bcp</b> might be more efficient.


title: SCRIPTING VARIABLES
content:
<b>sqlcmd</b> supports scripting variables that can be defined using the <b>-V</b> option or the <b>:setvar</b> command in interactive mode or scripts. These variables are referenced within T-SQL scripts using the syntax <i>$(VARIABLE_NAME)</i>. This feature is powerful for parameterizing scripts, allowing dynamic values for server names, database names, or other parameters without modifying the script file itself.


title: INTERACTIVE MODE
content:
When run without the <b>-Q</b>, <b>-q</b>, or <b>-i</b> options, <b>sqlcmd</b> enters an interactive mode. In this mode, users can type T-SQL statements directly at the <i>sqlcmd></i> prompt, execute them using the <b>GO</b> command, and view results. It supports various commands prefixed with a colon (e.g., <b>:quit</b> to exit, <b>:help</b> for assistance, <b>:r</b> to run a script). This mode is useful for ad-hoc queries, debugging, and interactive administration.


title: HISTORY
content:
<b>sqlcmd</b> was introduced with SQL Server 2005, largely replacing its predecessor, <b>osql</b>, as the primary command-line utility for SQL Server. Its availability on Linux is a more recent development, driven by Microsoft's strategy to make SQL Server accessible across multiple platforms. <br><br>On Linux, <b>sqlcmd</b> is typically installed as part of the <i>mssql-tools</i> package, allowing administrators and developers to manage SQL Server instances, whether they run on Linux, Windows, or in cloud services like Azure, directly from their Linux terminals. This cross-platform availability significantly expanded its utility and adoption within diverse IT environments.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>--version</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Show program's version number and exit.<br><br><b><b>-h</b>, <b>--help</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Show a help message for the <b>ipa</b> command or a specific subcommand and exit.<br><br><b><b>--debug</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enable verbose debug output, useful for troubleshooting.<br><br><b><b>--json</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Output results in JSON format, suitable for scripting and programmatic access.<br><br><b><b>--server=</b><i>SERVER</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Connect to the specified FreeIPA server hostname or IP address instead of the default.<br><br><b><b>--principal=</b><i>PRINCIPAL</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Authenticate as a specific Kerberos principal, overriding the default client principal.<br><br><b><b>--in-session</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Use an existing IPA session (if available) and do not create a new one. This implies that the user has already authenticated.<br><br><b><b>--no-session</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Do not use or create an IPA session for this command execution.<br><br><b><b>--skip-version-check</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Skip the client-server version compatibility check. Use with caution.<br><br><b><b>-e</b>, <b>--external</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Use external authentication via GSSAPI, typically used by external services or tools.<br><br><b><b>--config=</b><i>FILE</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Use a specific configuration file instead of the default <i>/etc/ipa/default.conf</i>.<br><br><b><b>--profile=</b><i>PROFILE</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Use a specific profile for configuration from the configuration file.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <b>ipa</b> command is the primary command-line interface for managing a FreeIPA environment. FreeIPA is an integrated security information management solution for Linux/UNIX networked environments. It provides centralized authentication, authorization, and account information by combining 389 Directory Server, MIT Kerberos, NTP, DNS, Dogtag Certificate System, and SSSD.<br><br>The <b>ipa</b> command allows administrators to perform a wide range of tasks, including creating and managing users, hosts, services, groups, sudo rules, HBAC rules, DNS records, and certificates. It acts as a dispatcher, taking various subcommands (e.g., <i>user-add</i>, <i>host-find</i>, <i>service-del</i>) to interact with the FreeIPA server and manage the integrated services.


title: CAVEATS
content:
The <b>ipa</b> command requires a functioning FreeIPA server infrastructure to be effective. Many commands require proper Kerberos authentication (a valid Kerberos ticket) for an administrative principal to execute successfully. The sheer number of subcommands and options can be daunting for new users, necessitating careful consultation of documentation or context-specific help.


title: SUBCOMMAND STRUCTURE
content:
The <b>ipa</b> command doesn't perform actions directly but dispatches them to specific subcommands. These subcommands are organized logically by the object they manage, e.g., <i>user</i>, <i>host</i>, <i>service</i>, <i>group</i>, <i>sudorule</i>, <i>hbacrule</i>, <i>cert</i>, <i>dns</i>. Each subcommand then has its own set of actions like <i>-add</i>, <i>-mod</i>, <i>-find</i>, <i>-show</i>, <i>-del</i>, and specific options related to that action. For example, to add a user, one would use <i>ipa user-add <username> [options]</i>.


title: AUTHENTICATION REQUIREMENTS
content:
For most administrative tasks, the <b>ipa</b> command relies on Kerberos for authentication. This means an administrator typically needs to obtain a Kerberos ticket-granting ticket (TGT) using the <b>kinit</b> command (e.g., <i>kinit admin</i>) before executing <b>ipa</b> commands. The command uses this TGT to authenticate to the FreeIPA server. If no valid ticket is present, the command may prompt for a password or fail with an authentication error.


title: CONFIGURATION FILES
content:
The behavior of the <b>ipa</b> client can be influenced by configuration files, primarily <i>/etc/ipa/default.conf</i>. This file contains settings such as the default FreeIPA server to connect to, Kerberos realm, client certificate paths, and other client-specific parameters. These settings can often be overridden by command-line options.


title: HISTORY
content:
The FreeIPA project was initiated around 2007-2008 by Red Hat as an open-source initiative to provide an integrated identity management solution on Linux. The <b>ipa</b> command-line tool has been a core component since its early days, evolving alongside the FreeIPA server to offer a consistent and comprehensive interface for administering the complex array of services it integrates, including 389 Directory Server, MIT Kerberos, and Dogtag Certificate System. Its development has focused on robustness, automation capabilities, and ease of use for administrators.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-i</b>, <b>--increment</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Increments the version number and opens an editor to add a new changelog entry. This is the default action.<br><br><b><b>-v</b> <i>&lt;version&gt;</i>, <b>--version</b> <i>&lt;version&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies an exact version string for the new changelog entry instead of incrementing automatically.<br><br><b><b>-r</b>, <b>--release</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Increments the version number, adds a new entry, and closes the editor, marking the changelog as ready for upload. Often used for final entries before release.<br><br><b><b>-n</b>, <b>--noconf</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Adds a new changelog entry using the provided <i>changelog-entry-text</i> without opening an editor. Useful for scripting.<br><br><b><b>-a</b>, <b>--auto</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Attempts to automatically determine the type of version increment (e.g., for a bugfix, a new upstream version, or a new Debian upload) based on existing entries and VCS information.<br><br><b><b>-u</b> <i>&lt;urgency&gt;</i>, <b>--urgency</b> <i>&lt;urgency&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the urgency field for the new changelog entry (e.g., <i>low</i>, <i>medium</i>, <i>high</i>, <i>emergency</i>).<br><br><b><b>-D</b> <i>&lt;distribution&gt;</i>, <b>--distribution</b> <i>&lt;distribution&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the target distribution for the changelog entry (e.g., <i>unstable</i>, <i>experimental</i>, <i>stable</i>).<br><br><b><b>-c</b> <i>&lt;file&gt;</i>, <b>--changelog</b> <i>&lt;file&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies an alternative changelog file to operate on instead of the default <i>debian/changelog</i>.<br><br><b><b>-U</b>, <b>--upstream</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Creates a new changelog entry specifically for a new upstream version, typically incrementing the upstream part of the version number.<br><br><b><b>-e</b>, <b>--edit</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Forces opening the editor to add a changelog message, even if <i>changelog-entry-text</i> is provided on the command line.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<b>dch</b> (Debian Changelog) is a powerful utility from the <i>devscripts</i> package designed to assist Debian package maintainers in managing the <i>debian/changelog</i> file. This file is fundamental for tracking all modifications, bug fixes, new features, and other changes introduced to a Debian package throughout its development lifecycle. <b>dch</b> automates the process of adding new entries, intelligently incrementing version numbers, and setting appropriate urgency levels and target distributions. It seamlessly integrates with a user's preferred text editor, allowing for easy composition of changelog entries while handling the required formatting and metadata. By simplifying changelog management, <b>dch</b> ensures compliance with Debian policy requirements and helps maintain a clear, chronological history of package evolution, which is invaluable for both developers and users.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<b>dch</b> primarily targets Debian's <i>3.0 (quilt)</i> source package format; its behavior with older or non-standard formats might be less predictable. It relies heavily on environment variables like <i>EDITOR</i> or <i>VISUAL</i> to determine which text editor to use. Incorrect versioning flags can lead to malformed changelog entries that might cause issues with tools like <b>dpkg-buildpackage</b>.


title: CHANGELOG FORMAT COMPLIANCE
content:
One of <b>dch</b>'s primary benefits is ensuring that the <i>debian/changelog</i> file adheres to the strict format detailed in the Debian Policy Manual. This adherence is crucial for other Debian tools, such as <b>dpkg-buildpackage</b>, to correctly parse package versions, maintainer information, and the list of changes, preventing build failures and package rejection.


title: INTEGRATION WITH EDITORS
content:
By default, <b>dch</b> leverages the user's preferred text editor (determined by the <i>EDITOR</i> or <i>VISUAL</i> environment variables). This integration allows developers to write detailed and expressive changelog messages in a familiar environment, providing flexibility while <b>dch</b> handles the boilerplate generation of headers, timestamps, and maintainer information.


title: HISTORY
content:
<b>dch</b> is an integral part of the <i>devscripts</i> package, a collection of essential utilities for Debian package development. It has been a cornerstone tool in Debian packaging for many years, evolving to meet the changing needs and policies of the Debian project. Its development reflects the community's continuous effort to streamline and standardize the package maintenance workflow, with a particular focus on correctly managing the critical <i>debian/changelog</i> file for bug fixes, new upstream releases, and general package updates.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><code>-k</code> <i>&lt;keyid&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the GPG key ID to use for signing. Overrides the <i>DEBSIGN_KEYID</i> environment variable.<br><br><b><code>-r</code></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Also signs the <i>.changes</i> file generated by <i>dpkg-buildpackage</i> in addition to the <i>.deb</i> file.<br><br><b><code>-e</code></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Signs only the <i>.changes</i> file, without signing the <i>.deb</i> file itself.<br><br><b><code>-p</code> <i>&lt;prog&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the GPG signing program to use (e.g., <i>gpg2</i>). Defaults to <i>gpg</i>.<br><br><b><code>-m</code> <i>&lt;maintainer&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Overrides the maintainer name in the <i>.changes</i> file for the signature.<br><br><b><code>-a</code> <i>&lt;architecture&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Overrides the architecture name in the <i>.changes</i> file.<br><br><b><code>-S</code></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Signs only the source package, specifically the <i>.dsc</i> and associated files via the <i>.changes</i> file.<br><br><b><code>-sa</code></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Signs the source package and prepares it for upload. Often implies a full source package build context.<br><br><b><code>-v</code></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enables verbose output, showing more details about the signing process.<br><br><b><code>--no-conf</code></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Prevents <i>debsign</i> from reading configuration files like <i>devscripts.conf</i> or <i>~/.devscripts</i>.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i><b>debsign</b></i> is a utility from the <i>devscripts</i> package used to digitally sign Debian binary (<i>.deb</i>) and source (<i>.changes</i>) packages using <i>GnuPG</i> (<i>GPG</i>). It ensures the authenticity and integrity of packages by embedding a cryptographic signature within the package's control information or associated <i>.changes</i> file. This signature can later be verified by tools like <i>dpkg --verify</i> or by inspecting the <i>.changes</i> file, providing a layer of trust for package users and maintainers.<br><br>The command automates the often complex process of extracting relevant control files, signing them with the specified <i>GPG</i> key, and then re-inserting them into the <i>.deb</i> archive, or directly signing the <i>.changes</i> file. It is a crucial step for Debian developers and maintainers before uploading packages to official repositories, ensuring that distributed packages are untampered and originate from a trusted source.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<i><b>debsign</b></i> requires <i>gpg</i> (or <i>gpg2</i>) to be installed and configured with the signing key. When signing a <i>.deb</i>, it modifies the package's internal control structure by inserting a <i>_gpgorigin</i> pseudo-control file containing the signature; this file is checked by <i>dpkg --verify</i>. For proper package integrity, <i>debsign</i> should ideally be used on packages just before distribution, or as part of an automated build system that ensures the package hasn't been tampered with prior to signing.


title: CONFIGURATION FILES
content:
<i><b>debsign</b></i> respects several configuration files from the <i>devscripts</i> package, including <i>~/.devscripts</i> and <i>/etc/devscripts.conf</i>. These files can be used to set default options, such as the <i>GPG</i> key ID (<i>DEBSIGN_KEYID</i>), allowing for consistent signing practices without repeatedly specifying options on the command line.


title: ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES
content:
The <i>DEBSIGN_KEYID</i> environment variable can be used to specify the <i>GPG</i> key ID for signing. This variable takes precedence over values found in configuration files but can be overridden by the <i>-k</i> command-line option.


title: HISTORY
content:
<i><b>debsign</b></i> is a long-standing component of the <i>devscripts</i> package, a collection of utilities essential for Debian package creation and maintenance. It has been a standard tool for signing packages within the Debian ecosystem, evolving alongside <i>dpkg</i> and <i>gpg</i> to ensure secure and verifiable package distribution. Its primary role is to simplify the often complex process of applying GPG signatures to <i>.deb</i> files and their corresponding <i>.changes</i> files, a crucial step for official Debian package uploads and maintaining trust in the distribution chain.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-o</b> <i>&lt;FILE&gt;</i>, <b>--output</b> <i>&lt;FILE&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the path for the output <i>.dex</i> file. If not provided, it typically defaults to <i>classes.dex</i> in the current directory.<br><br><b><b>-a</b> <i>&lt;API_LEVEL&gt;</i>, <b>--api</b> <i>&lt;API_LEVEL&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the target Android API level for the generated <i>.dex</i> file. This influences the selection of available opcodes and bytecode verification rules.<br><br><b><b>-j</b> <i>&lt;THREADS&gt;</i>, <b>--jobs</b> <i>&lt;THREADS&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Utilizes the specified number of threads for parallel assembly, significantly speeding up the process on multi-core processors.<br><br><b><b>-v</b>, <b>--version</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Prints the version information of the <i>smali</i> assembler and then exits.<br><br><b><b>-h</b>, <b>--help</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays a comprehensive help message, detailing all available command-line options and their respective usage.<br><br><b><b>--allow-odex-insns</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Allows the processing of ODEX (optimized DEX) instructions in the input <i>.smali</i> files. These are typically found in pre-verified classes on older Android versions and should be used with caution.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>smali</i> is the assembler component of the <i>smali/baksmali</i> toolchain, a critical utility for Android development and reverse engineering. It translates human-readable <i>.smali</i> assembly files back into executable Dalvik bytecode, which is encapsulated within a <i>.dex</i> (Dalvik Executable) file.<br><br>The Dalvik bytecode forms the instruction set for the Android Runtime (ART) or the older Dalvik Virtual Machine (DVM), enabling the execution of Android applications. While its counterpart, <i>baksmali</i>, disassembles DEX files into <i>.smali</i> source, <i>smali</i> performs the essential reverse operation, allowing developers and security researchers to modify application logic at a low level.<br><br>This process is fundamental for tasks such as patching existing applications, injecting custom code, or altering application behavior without access to the original source code. <i>smali</i> fully supports the various Dalvik opcodes and directives, providing granular control over the compiled application's functionality and structure.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<i>smali</i> typically runs as a Java application (e.g., <code>java -jar smali.jar</code>), requiring a Java Runtime Environment (JRE) to be installed on the system. It is a low-level tool that demands a solid understanding of Dalvik bytecode and Android internals for effective and error-free usage. Assembly errors can be challenging to debug and might result in malformed DEX files or application crashes. The resulting DEX file often needs to be signed and aligned as part of a larger APK recompilation process for proper functionality on an Android device.


title: COMMON WORKFLOW
content:
<i>smali</i> is most frequently employed in tandem with its disassembler counterpart, <i>baksmali</i>. The typical workflow involves: <br>1. Using <i>baksmali</i> to disassemble an APK's <i>classes.dex</i> file into a collection of human-readable <i>.smali</i> files.<br>2. Making necessary modifications or additions to these <i>.smali</i> files.<br>3. Employing <i>smali</i> to reassemble the modified <i>.smali</i> files back into a new <i>classes.dex</i> file.<br>4. Re-packaging this new <i>.dex</i> file into the original APK, which then needs to be signed and zip-aligned before it can be successfully installed and run on an Android device.


title: HISTORY
content:
The <i>smali/baksmali</i> toolchain was conceptualized and developed by JesusFreke (Ben Gruver) around 2010. It rapidly established itself as the authoritative standard for manipulating Dalvik bytecode, filling a critical void in the Android development and reverse engineering landscape. Its precision, extensive support for Dalvik opcodes, and ongoing development propelled its adoption across the Android modding, custom ROM, and security research communities. It remains an indispensable utility for deep-dive analysis and modification of Android applications at the bytecode level, continually evolving to support new Android versions and bytecode formats like ART.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>-o &lt;dir&gt;, --output &lt;dir&gt;</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the output directory where the disassembled Smali files will be stored.<br><br><b>-a &lt;api&gt;, --api &lt;api&gt;</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the Android API level to use for disassembling, affecting instruction interpretation and syntax (default: 15).<br><br><b>-d &lt;dir&gt;, --bootclasspath-dir &lt;dir&gt;</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Provides a directory containing bootclasspath JARs/APKs, useful for resolving references.<br><br><b>-p &lt;classpath&gt;, --classpath &lt;classpath&gt;</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Adds additional classpath entries (JARs, APKs, or directories) to resolve external references.<br><br><b>-b, --debug-info</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Includes debug information (e.g., source file, line numbers) in the disassembled output.<br><br><b>-L, --list-classes</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Instead of disassembling, only lists the fully qualified names of classes found in the input DEX file(s).<br><br><b>-x, --extract-dex</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Extracts all inner DEX files found within the input file(s) instead of disassembling them.<br><br><b>--ignore-errors</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Attempts to continue disassembling even if errors are encountered in the input DEX file(s).<br><br><b>--version</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays the current version of <i>baksmali</i>.<br><br><b>--help</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Shows the command-line help message with all available options.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>baksmali</i> is a disassembler for <b>Dalvik Executable (DEX)</b> files, which are the bytecode format used by Android applications. Its primary function is to convert DEX bytecode into human-readable <b>Smali assembly code</b>. This process is crucial for reverse engineering Android applications, allowing developers and security researchers to understand, analyze, and modify application logic at a low level.<br><br>It is the counterpart to the <i>smali</i> assembler, which takes Smali assembly code and converts it back into DEX bytecode. Together, <i>smali</i> and <i>baksmali</i> form the backbone of many Android application analysis and modification toolchains, including popular tools like <b>apktool</b>. Users often extract a DEX file from an APK, run <i>baksmali</i> on it, make modifications to the resulting Smali files, and then use <i>smali</i> to re-assemble them into a new DEX file, which can then be re-packaged into an APK.


title: CAVEATS
content:
When working with obfuscated Android applications, the disassembled Smali code can be significantly harder to read and analyze due to techniques like name mangling and control flow obfuscation.<br><br>Choosing the correct <b>API level</b> with <i>-a</i> is important; incorrect API levels might lead to syntax errors or misinterpretation of certain instructions specific to different Android versions.<br><br>Large or complex DEX files can result in a significant number of Smali files and may take a considerable amount of time to disassemble.


title: SMALI ASSEMBLY LANGUAGE
content:
The output of <i>baksmali</i> is code written in <b>Smali</b>, a human-readable assembly language for the <b>Dalvik/ART virtual machine</b>. Smali closely mirrors the underlying DEX bytecode instructions, making it a low-level representation suitable for precise analysis and modification that higher-level decompilers might miss.


title: INTEGRATION WITH APKTOOL
content:
<i>baksmali</i> (and <i>smali</i>) are core components of <b>APKTool</b>, a popular third-party tool for reverse engineering Android applications. APKTool automates the extraction, disassembling, reassembling, and re-signing processes, simplifying complex tasks for Android app modders and analysts by integrating <i>baksmali</i>'s functionality.


title: HISTORY
content:
The <i>smali/baksmali</i> project was created by R. "JesusFreke" P. around 2010. It quickly became an essential open-source tool for Android application reverse engineering due to its accuracy and flexibility in handling the Dalvik (and later ART) bytecode format. Its development has closely tracked changes in the Android platform, adapting to new DEX formats and instruction sets, solidifying its role as a fundamental utility in the Android security and development community.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><i>sequence</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the particular sequence of <i>dh_*</i> helper commands to execute. If omitted, <i>dh</i> defaults to a standard, context-dependent sequence based on the invoked <i>make</i> target (e.g., <i>build</i>, <i>clean</i>, <i>binary</i>).<br><br><b><b>--with</b> <i>&lt;addon&gt;[,&lt;addon&gt;...]</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enables one or more build system addons. Addons extend <i>dh</i>'s capabilities to support specific technologies or build systems (e.g., <i>autotools</i>, <i>cmake</i>, <i>python3</i>). Multiple addons can be specified comma-separated.<br><br><b><b>--without</b> <i>&lt;addon&gt;[,&lt;addon&gt;...]</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Disables one or more build system addons. This can be useful to override default addon detection or exclude specific functionalities.<br><br><b><b>--list-addons</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Lists all available build system addons that <i>dh</i> can utilize.<br><br><b><b>--builddirectory</b> <i>&lt;dir&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies an alternative directory (<i>&lt;dir&gt;</i>) to be used for performing the package build. Defaults to a standard build directory within the source tree.<br><br><b><b>--sourcedirectory</b> <i>&lt;dir&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the directory (<i>&lt;dir&gt;</i>) containing the package source code. Defaults to the current directory.<br><br><b><b>--autoclean</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Ensures that <i>dh_clean</i> is called after a successful build process. This helps in maintaining a clean source tree.<br><br><b><b>--no-act</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Performs a 'dry run'. <i>dh</i> will show what commands it *would* execute without actually running them. Useful for debugging packaging rules.<br><br><b><b>--fail-missing</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Causes <i>dh</i> to exit with an error if any expected files are missing after a command, instead of proceeding.<br><br><b><b>--until</b> <i>&lt;command&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Executes the sequence of helper commands up to, but not including, the specified <i>&lt;command&gt;</i>. Useful for debugging or manual intervention.<br><br><b><b>--after</b> <i>&lt;command&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Executes the sequence of helper commands starting from the command immediately after the specified <i>&lt;command&gt;</i>. Useful for resuming a build or skipping initial steps.<br><br><b><b>--parallel</b>[=<i>&lt;N&gt;</i>]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Allows commands to be run in parallel, potentially speeding up the build process. An optional number <i>&lt;N&gt;</i> can specify the maximum number of parallel jobs.<br><br><b><b>--no-parallel</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Disables parallel execution of commands, ensuring they run sequentially.<br><br><b><b>--verbose</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Increases the verbosity of the output, showing more details about the commands being executed.<br><br><b><b>--quiet</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Suppresses non-error output, making the build process quieter.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>dh</i>, or Debian Helper, is a program that streamlines and automates the process of building Debian packages. It acts as a wrapper around a series of individual helper commands, typically prefixed with <i>dh_</i> (e.g., <i>dh_make</i>, <i>dh_auto_configure</i>, <i>dh_install</i>). Instead of manually calling each helper, <i>dh</i> orchestrates their execution in a logical sequence based on the specified build target (like building, cleaning, or installing). This significantly simplifies the <i>debian/rules</i> file, making it more concise and maintainable by abstracting common packaging tasks. It supports various build systems through 'addons' and provides options to customize the build process.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<i>dh</i> is primarily designed for use within the <i>debian/rules</i> file of a Debian source package. It is not typically executed directly by users from the command line in the same way as common utilities like <i>ls</i> or <i>grep</i>. Its effectiveness relies heavily on a correctly structured Debian package source tree and the implicit understanding of packaging conventions. While it greatly simplifies packaging, complex or non-standard build processes might still require manual override or custom helper scripts.


title: COMMON USAGE IN <I>DEBIAN/RULES</I>
content:
The most common way to invoke <i>dh</i> is within the <i>debian/rules</i> file of a Debian source package using <b>dh $@</b>. The <b>$@</b> is a special <i>make</i> variable that expands to the name of the current target being built (e.g., <i>build</i>, <i>clean</i>, <i>binary</i>). This allows <i>dh</i> to automatically execute the appropriate sequence of helper commands for that specific <i>make</i> target, making the <i>debian/rules</i> file very concise, often just a single line per target or even just a single <b>override_dh_*</b> block for customization.


title: UNDERSTANDING ADDONS
content:
Addons are extensions that teach <i>dh</i> how to interact with different build systems or handle specific types of packages. For instance, the <i>autotools</i> addon provides support for packages using GNU Autoconf/Automake, while <i>python3</i> handles Python 3 packages. When <i>dh</i> is invoked, it attempts to detect the build system automatically and enable relevant addons. Users can explicitly enable or disable addons using the <b>--with</b> and <b>--without</b> options, offering fine-grained control over the build process.


title: HISTORY
content:
The <i>dh</i> command is part of the <i>debhelper</i> suite, which was created to simplify the creation of Debian packages. Before <i>debhelper</i>, <i>debian/rules</i> files were often very long and complex, requiring detailed knowledge of <i>dpkg</i> internals. <i>debhelper</i>, and subsequently the <i>dh</i> command, introduced a more declarative and modular approach, abstracting away much of the boilerplate. Over time, <i>dh</i> evolved to support various build systems through its addon mechanism, becoming the standard and recommended way to build most Debian packages, reducing maintenance effort and improving consistency across packages.


title: SEE ALSO
content:
debian/rules(5), dh_make(1), dpkg-buildpackage(1), dh_auto_build(1), dh_auto_clean(1), dh_auto_configure(1), dh_auto_install(1), dh_install(1), debhelper(7)


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<pre><b>xmlcatalog</b> [<i>OPTIONS</i>] [<i>CATALOG_FILE</i>] [<i>COMMAND</i>] [<i>ARGS</i>]</pre><br>Common commands include `add`, `del`, `convert`, `dump`, `resolve`, and `validate`.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>`--help`</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display a brief help message and exit.<br><br><b>`--version`</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display the version information and exit.<br><br><b>`-v, --verbose`</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Output verbose processing information, showing progress and details of operations.<br><br><b>`--debug`</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Output extensive debugging information, useful for troubleshooting.<br><br><b>`--sgml`</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Instruct `xmlcatalog` to operate on SGML catalogs rather than XML catalogs. This changes the parsing and output formats accordingly.<br><br><b>`--noout`</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Do not output the resulting catalog to standard output after modifications. Useful when only side effects (like creating a file) are desired.<br><br><b>`--create`</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Create the catalog file if it does not exist. This option is necessary when performing operations on a non-existent catalog.<br><br><b>`--valid`</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Validate the resulting catalog against its schema after any modifications have been applied, ensuring its well-formedness and correctness.<br><br><b>`--quiet`</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Suppress all error messages and warnings, useful for scripting or when minimal output is desired.<br><br><b>`--sort`</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sort the catalog entries alphabetically after modifications. This helps in maintaining a consistent and readable catalog file.<br><br><b>`CATALOG_FILE`</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The path to the XML or SGML catalog file upon which to perform operations. This is often `/etc/xml/catalog` or a local project-specific catalog.<br><br><b>`COMMAND`</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The specific operation to perform on the catalog. Examples include `add` (to add an entry), `del` (to delete an entry), `convert` (to change catalog format), `dump` (to view contents), `resolve` (to find an entity), and `validate` (to check integrity).<br><br><b>`ARGS`</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Additional arguments required by the chosen `COMMAND`, such as the type of entry (e.g., `public`, `system`, `uri`), public ID, system ID, or URI for commands like `add` or `resolve`.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The `xmlcatalog` command is a utility provided by the `libxml2` library for managing <I>OASIS XML Catalog</I> files. These catalogs provide a mechanism to remap public identifiers, system identifiers, or URIs to local resources, effectively allowing XML processors to resolve external entities (like DTDs, XML Schemas, or stylesheets) without needing network access or relying on hardcoded paths.<br><br>It supports various operations: adding new entries, deleting existing ones, converting SGML catalogs to XML format, dumping the catalog contents, resolving specific entities, and validating the catalog itself. This tool is invaluable in development and deployment environments where XML documents need to be validated or processed against locally cached schemas or DTDs, providing robustness and performance benefits by decoupling resource location from their public identifiers. It's a key component for creating self-contained and efficient XML processing workflows.


title: CAVEATS
content:
Catalogs can become complex; errors in configuration, such as incorrect identifiers or paths, can lead to unexpected entity resolution failures or difficulties in XML processing.<br><br>The `xmlcatalog` utility relies on the `libxml2` library, ensuring consistency with other `libxml2`-based tools but also coupling its functionality to that specific library's implementation of the OASIS XML Catalog specification. While `xmlcatalog` handles OASIS XML Catalogs, there are other catalog specifications (e.g., Apache XML Commons Resolver), and compatibility between different implementations might vary.


title: CATALOG ENTRY TYPES
content:
`xmlcatalog` supports adding various types of entries, each serving a specific purpose in resolving XML entities:<br><ul><li><b>`public`</b>: Maps a public identifier (e.g., for DTDs) to a system identifier (typically a local file path or URI).</li><li><b>`system`</b>: Maps a system identifier (a URI) to another system identifier (often a local file path).</li><li><b>`uri`</b>: Maps a URI (or a URI prefix) to another URI (or local file path).</li><li><b>`rewriteSystem`</b>: Rewrites a system identifier by replacing a specified prefix with another.</li><li><b>`rewriteURI`</b>: Rewrites a URI by replacing a specified prefix with another.</li><li><b>`delegatePublic`</b>, <b>`delegateSystem`</b>, <b>`delegateURI`</b>: Delegates the resolution of a set of identifiers/URIs (based on a prefix or public ID) to another catalog file. This allows for modular catalog management.</li></ul>


title: EXAMPLE USAGE
content:
To add a public entry mapping an XHTML DTD public ID to a local file path in `/etc/xml/catalog`:<br>`<pre><b>xmlcatalog --add public "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Strict//EN" "file:///usr/share/xml/dtd/xhtml1/xhtml1-strict.dtd" /etc/xml/catalog</b></pre>`<br><br>To resolve a system entity URI using a specific catalog file:<br>`<pre><b>xmlcatalog --resolve system "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-strict.dtd" /etc/xml/catalog</b></pre>`<br><br>To dump the current contents of the system-wide XML catalog:<br>`<pre><b>xmlcatalog --dump /etc/xml/catalog</b></pre>`<br><br>To create a new catalog file and add a URI mapping to it:<br>`<pre><b>xmlcatalog --create --add uri "http://example.com/schemas/" "file:///home/user/myproject/schemas/" my_project_catalog.xml</b></pre>`


title: HISTORY
content:
`xmlcatalog` is an integral part of the `libxml2` library, which was initiated by Daniel Veillard in 1999. It emerged as a response to the growing need for robust and efficient XML processing tools on Unix-like systems. The utility's development closely followed the evolution of the <I>OASIS XML Catalog Specification</I>, providing a standard-compliant way to manage external entity resolution. Its inclusion in `libxml2` solidified its role as a fundamental tool for developers working with XML, especially in environments where offline validation, controlled resource access, and efficient processing are critical. It has been a stable component of `libxml2` for many years.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-delay</b> <i>value</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the interframe delay in 1/100ths of a second. For example, <b>-delay 100</b> means 100ms per frame.<br><br><b><b>-loop</b> <i>value</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the number of times the animation should loop. A value of <b>0</b> indicates continuous looping.<br><br><b><b>-geometry</b> <i>WxH+X+Y</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Defines the preferred size (<i>Width</i>x<i>Height</i>) and position (<i>+X+Y</i>) of the animation window on the display.<br><br><b><b>-background</b> <i>color</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the background color of the animation canvas. This is visible if image frames do not cover the entire window.<br><br><b><b>-display</b> <i>server</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the X server to connect to. Useful when running `animate` remotely or with multiple X servers.<br><br><b><b>-dispose</b> <i>method</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Controls how the previous frame is treated before displaying the next one (e.g., <b>None</b>, <b>Background</b>, <b>Previous</b>).<br><br><b><b>-monitor</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Monitors the progress of the animation display, often by printing messages to standard error.<br><br><b><b>-verbose</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Prints detailed information about each image frame, including its size, format, and other attributes.<br><br><b><b>-version</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays the program version and copyright information, then exits.<br><br><b><b>-help</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Shows a summary of command-line options and usage instructions, then exits.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <b>animate</b> command, an integral part of the ImageMagick software suite, serves as a robust utility for playing a sequence of images or a multi-frame image file (like a GIF) as an animation on an X server display. It enables users to visualize how a series of images will appear when played sequentially, which is particularly useful for previewing animations before final rendering or for simple viewing. The command supports a wide array of image formats and provides numerous options to fine-tune animation properties, including the delay between frames, looping behavior, window geometry, and background settings. It's an essential tool for graphic designers, developers, and anyone working with animated visual content within a Linux environment, offering immediate feedback to help optimize visual effects.


title: CAVEATS
content:
The <b>animate</b> command requires an X server to display the animation; it will not function in a purely console-only environment without X forwarding. Performance can be significantly influenced by image dimensions, the total number of frames, and available system resources. Also, rendering accuracy for certain advanced animation features or specific GIF disposal methods may vary depending on the ImageMagick version or the capabilities of the X server in use.


title: INPUT IMAGE SEQUENCES
content:
The command can accept multiple individual image files as arguments (e.g., <i>image01.png image02.png</i>), or it can process a single multi-frame image file (e.g., <i>animation.gif</i>) directly as its input.


title: ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES
content:
The behavior of <b>animate</b> and other ImageMagick tools can be influenced by environment variables. For instance, <i>MAGICK_HOME</i> can be set to specify the installation location of ImageMagick configuration files.


title: HISTORY
content:
<b>animate</b> is a fundamental utility within the ImageMagick software suite, which was first conceived in 1987 and subsequently open-sourced in 1990. It has undergone continuous development and maintenance, adapting to advancements in graphics hardware and image processing algorithms. Its core function has consistently been to offer a straightforward, command-line interface for viewing image sequences as animations, a capability that remains crucial for various imaging workflows, particularly in automated scripting and server-side environments.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-i</b> <i>file</i>, <b>--input=</b><i>file</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the input file. This can be a resource script (<code>.rc</code>) for compilation or a binary resource (<code>.res</code>) for decompilation.<br><br><b><b>-o</b> <i>file</i>, <b>--output=</b><i>file</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the output file. This will typically be a binary resource (<code>.res</code>) when compiling or a resource script (<code>.rc</code>) when decompiling.<br><br><b><b>--input-format=</b><i>format</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the format of the input file. Common formats include <code>rc</code> (resource script), <code>res</code> (binary resource), and <code>coff</code> (COFF object file with resources).<br><br><b><b>--output-format=</b><i>format</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the desired format for the output file. Typical values are <code>rc</code> or <code>res</code>.<br><br><b><b>--target=</b><i>bfdname</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the target BFD architecture for the output <code>.res</code> file. Examples include <code>pe-i386</code> for 32-bit Windows or <code>pe-x86-64</code> for 64-bit Windows.<br><br><b><b>-I</b> <i>dir</i>, <b>--include-dir=</b><i>dir</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Adds <i>dir</i> to the list of directories that will be searched for included files during the preprocessing of resource scripts.<br><br><b><b>-D</b> <i>macro</i>, <b>--define=</b><i>macro</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Defines a macro, which is passed to the preprocessor when compiling resource scripts, similar to <code>-D</code> in <code>gcc</code>.<br><br><b><b>-U</b> <i>macro</i>, <b>--undefine=</b><i>macro</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Undefines a macro, passed to the preprocessor.<br><br><b><b>--preprocessor=</b><i>program</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies an external preprocessor program to use instead of the default one for resource script processing.<br><br><b><b>-l</b> <i>langid</i>, <b>--language=</b><i>langid</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the default language ID for resources that do not explicitly specify one.<br><br><b><b>-v</b>, <b>--verbose</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enables verbose output, displaying more detailed information about the processing steps.<br><br><b><b>--help</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays a help message and exits.<br><br><b><b>--version</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays the version information and exits.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<b>windres</b> is the GNU resource compiler, a key component of the GNU Binutils project. Its primary function is to process resource script (<code>.rc</code>) files, which define user interface elements and data for Windows applications, and compile them into binary resource (<code>.res</code>) files. Conversely, it can also decompile existing <code>.res</code> files or resources embedded within Portable Executable (PE) files (like <code>.exe</code> or <code>.dll</code>) back into human-readable <code>.rc</code> scripts.<br><br>This tool is indispensable for cross-development environments, particularly for developers on Unix-like operating systems (such as Linux or macOS) who need to build applications for Microsoft Windows targets using toolchains like MinGW-w64. It enables these applications to incorporate native Windows elements such as icons, cursors, menus, dialog boxes, string tables, and version information, ensuring a consistent and complete Windows user experience.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<b>windres</b> is specifically designed for handling resources for Microsoft Windows PE (Portable Executable) files and is not intended for managing native Linux resources. When used to build Windows applications on Linux, it requires a correctly configured cross-compilation toolchain, such as MinGW-w64. The syntax of Windows resource script (<code>.rc</code>) files can be intricate, and while <b>windres</b> aims for compatibility with Microsoft's <code>RC.exe</code>, subtle differences or complex resource definitions might occasionally lead to unexpected behavior.


title: RESOURCE SCRIPT (<CODE>.RC</CODE>) FILES
content:
These are plain text files that define the resources to be embedded within a Windows application. They can specify various elements like icons, cursors, bitmaps, menus, dialog boxes, string tables, version information, and even custom binary data. <b>windres</b> reads and preprocesses these files to generate the binary resource output.


title: BINARY RESOURCE (<CODE>.RES</CODE>) FILES
content:
After compilation by <b>windres</b>, the output is typically a <code>.res</code> file. This binary file contains the compiled resources in a format suitable for linking. It is then combined with compiled object files (<code>.obj</code>) by a linker (like <b>ld</b>) to form a complete Windows Portable Executable (PE) file, such as an <code>.exe</code> or <code>.dll</code>.


title: INTEGRATION WITH MINGW-W64
content:
In a typical cross-compilation workflow on Linux for Windows, <b>windres</b> is often invoked as part of the MinGW-w64 toolchain. The specific command might be prefixed to target the correct architecture, for example, <code>x86_64-w64-mingw32-windres</code>, ensuring that the compiled resources are compatible with the intended Windows architecture (e.g., 64-bit Windows).


title: HISTORY
content:
<b>windres</b> is an integral component of the GNU Binutils project, a comprehensive collection of programming tools. Its development was driven by the necessity to provide a free and open-source alternative to Microsoft's proprietary Resource Compiler (<code>RC.exe</code>). This tool was crucial for advancing cross-compilation efforts, enabling developers on Unix-like operating systems to build fully functional applications for Windows targets. Its continued evolution supports projects like MinGW (Minimalist GNU for Windows) and Wine, allowing the seamless integration of native Windows resources (such as icons, dialogs, and version information) into executables and libraries compiled in non-Windows environments.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>gdmflexiserver</b> [<i>options</i>]<br><br><i>(Note: This command is typically invoked internally by GDM and not meant for direct user execution.)</i>


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><i>(Internal options)</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;<i>gdmflexiserver</i> is primarily an internal component of GDM. It does not expose a public set of command-line parameters for direct user interaction. Any options it accepts are typically for internal configuration or debugging purposes when called by the GDM daemon itself.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>gdmflexiserver</i> is an internal utility primarily used by the GNOME Display Manager (GDM) to manage flexible X server sessions. Its historical significance lies in its ability to handle complex display configurations, such as XDMCP (X Display Manager Control Protocol) remote logins, multi-seat setups, and the dynamic switching between different X server implementations (e.g., Xorg, Xnest). It allows GDM to gracefully start, stop, and oversee the lifecycle of the X servers responsible for providing the graphical login interface and subsequent user sessions.<br><br>While its direct user-facing interaction has diminished in modern GDM versions, particularly with the increasing adoption of Wayland as the default display server and more streamlined desktop environments, <i>gdmflexiserver</i> remains a core backend component. It orchestrates the essential steps of preparing and managing the graphical environment before a user's session fully commences, ensuring a robust and adaptable display manager experience.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<ul><li><b>Internal Use Only:</b> This command is not intended for direct execution by users. Attempting to run it manually can lead to unexpected behavior, system instability, or security issues with your display manager.</li><li><b>Evolving Role:</b> The exact functionality and importance of <i>gdmflexiserver</i> have evolved with GDM's development, especially with the shift from X11-centric environments to Wayland. Some historical features it managed might now be handled differently or deprecated.</li><li><b>Debugging:</b> When troubleshooting GDM-related display issues, it's generally more effective to consult GDM's logs (e.g., using <i>journalctl -u gdm</i>) rather than trying to interact directly with <i>gdmflexiserver</i>.</li></ul>


title: ROLE IN GDM ARCHITECTURE
content:
Within the GDM architecture, <i>gdmflexiserver</i> acts as a critical intermediary. When GDM starts, it determines the type of display server needed (Xorg for X11 sessions, or a Wayland compositor). For X11, <i>gdmflexiserver</i> is responsible for launching and managing the appropriate X server instance (e.g., <i>Xorg</i>) and ensuring it's ready to present the GDM login screen. It handles the low-level details of X server setup, freeing the main GDM daemon to focus on session management and user authentication.


title: XDMCP AND MULTI-SEAT IMPORTANCE
content:
Historically, <i>gdmflexiserver</i> was key to GDM's support for XDMCP. It enabled the display manager to listen for incoming XDMCP requests from remote X terminals and provide them with a login prompt, effectively turning a Linux machine into an X server for network clients. Similarly, in multi-seat configurations (where multiple users can simultaneously use separate monitors, keyboards, and mice on a single physical computer), <i>gdmflexiserver</i> would manage the distinct X server instances for each 'seat', ensuring independent graphical environments.


title: HISTORY
content:
The concept behind <i>gdmflexiserver</i> emerged in earlier versions of GDM to address the need for greater flexibility in managing X servers. Prior to this, display managers often had more rigid control over the X server's lifecycle. It was particularly important for enabling features like XDMCP (allowing remote X clients to log in via GDM) and supporting complex multi-seat configurations where a single machine could host multiple independent graphical sessions. Over time, as GDM matured and the focus shifted towards more integrated desktop environments and Wayland, its role has become more of a behind-the-scenes orchestrator, less directly exposed or configured by the end-user, but still fundamental to GDM's internal X server management capabilities.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>domainname</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The new NIS domain name to set for the system. This operation typically requires root privileges.<br><br><b>-V</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays the version information of the <b>nisdomainname</b> utility and exits.<br><br><b>--version</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Same as <i>-V</i>; displays the version information of the <b>nisdomainname</b> utility and exits.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<b>nisdomainname</b> is a utility used to display or set the Network Information Service (NIS) domain name for the current system. NIS, originally known as Yellow Pages (YP), is a client-server directory service protocol for distributing system configuration data such as user and host names between computers on a network. While less prevalent in modern environments, it was historically important for centralized management in Unix-like systems.<br><br>When invoked without any arguments, <b>nisdomainname</b> will print the current NIS domain name that the system is configured to use. If a <i>domainname</i> argument is provided, the command attempts to set the system's NIS domain name to the specified value. This operation typically requires superuser privileges (e.g., using <i>sudo</i>). It's important to note that setting the NIS domain name affects how the system interacts with NIS servers for user authentication, host lookups, and other shared network information. It is distinct from the general system's hostname or DNS domain name, which are managed by commands like <b>hostname</b> or <b>domainname</b>.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<b>nisdomainname</b> requires root privileges to set the NIS domain name. The NIS service itself is considered a legacy technology; many modern Linux distributions prefer LDAP, Kerberos, or other centralized authentication and information services. Setting the NIS domain name does not automatically start or configure NIS client daemons (like <i>ypbind</i>); it only sets the name by which these daemons will identify themselves to NIS servers. Changes may not take effect immediately for running services and might require restarts.


title: CONFIGURATION PERSISTENCE
content:
The NIS domain name set by <b>nisdomainname</b> is often not persistent across reboots unless configured in a system-specific configuration file (e.g., in <i>/etc/sysconfig/network</i> on some Red Hat-based systems or via network configuration scripts). Administrators typically ensure persistence through their distribution's standard networking setup.


title: NIS VS. DNS
content:
<b>nisdomainname</b> manages the NIS domain name, which is completely separate from the DNS (Domain Name System) domain name. While both relate to network naming, NIS is for distributing system maps (users, hosts, etc.) within a local administrative domain, whereas DNS resolves internet hostnames to IP addresses globally.


title: HISTORY
content:
The <b>nisdomainname</b> command is part of the <i>yp-tools</i> package, which provides various client-side utilities for interacting with NIS. Its origins trace back to Sun Microsystems' Yellow Pages (YP) service, introduced in SunOS, which was later rebranded as NIS to avoid trademark conflicts. The command's functionality has remained largely consistent over decades, reflecting its role in a mature, though now less commonly used, network service architecture.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><i>domainname</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the new NIS domain name to be set for the system. This action typically requires superuser (root) privileges to execute successfully.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The <b>ypdomainname</b> command is utilized to retrieve or assign the <i>Network Information Service</i> (NIS) domain name for the current host. NIS, which was originally known as <i>Yellow Pages</i> (YP), is an older client-server protocol developed for distributing system configuration data, such as user and host information, across a network of computers. When invoked without any arguments, <b>ypdomainname</b> will display the system's currently configured NIS domain name.<br><br>If a domain name is provided as an argument, the command attempts to set the new NIS domain name for the system. This operation typically requires superuser (root) privileges to modify the system's network configuration. Establishing the correct NIS domain name is critical for NIS clients to successfully locate and communicate with NIS servers on the network. While NIS has largely been superseded by modern directory services like LDAP and DNS for many contemporary use cases, <b>ypdomainname</b> remains a fundamental utility for managing existing NIS environments, particularly in legacy systems.


title: CAVEATS
content:
NIS is considered an older technology, and its usage has significantly declined in favor of more modern and secure directory services like LDAP and DNS. Setting the NIS domain name with <b>ypdomainname</b> modifies the kernel's NIS domain setting and generally requires root privileges. It is important to note that this command manages the <i>NIS domain</i>, which is distinct from the <i>DNS domain</i> used for internet name resolution.


title: KERNEL INTERACTION
content:
When <b>ypdomainname</b> is used to set a new NIS domain name, it typically interacts with and modifies the kernel's `domainname` parameter. This parameter can also be directly inspected or modified via the `/proc/sys/kernel/domainname` file or using the <b>sysctl</b> command, which provides a more generic interface to kernel parameters.


title: DNS VS. NIS DOMAIN
content:
It is crucial to understand that the NIS domain name managed by <b>ypdomainname</b> is entirely separate from the DNS (Domain Name System) domain name. The NIS domain is specifically used for internal network services like user authentication and host lookups within an NIS environment, whereas the DNS domain is utilized for global hostname resolution across the Internet and local IP networks.


title: HISTORY
content:
NIS, initially called <i>Yellow Pages</i> (YP) by Sun Microsystems, was developed in the 1980s as a centralized network information service for UNIX-like systems. Due to trademark conflicts with British Telecom's 'Yellow Pages' directory, Sun subsequently renamed the service to NIS. However, many associated commands, including <b>ypdomainname</b>, retained the original 'yp' prefix. Its inclusion in standard UNIX distributions and later Linux systems ensured its widespread adoption, though its prominence has diminished with the advent of newer, more robust network directory services.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-dns &lt;domain&gt;</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the target <i>domain</i> for DNS enumeration.<br>Example: <i>-dns example.com</i><br><br><b><b>-range &lt;IP range&gt;</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies an <i>IP range</i> (e.g., CIDR notation) to scan for hosts.<br>Example: <i>-range 192.168.1.0/24</i><br><br><b><b>-file &lt;filename&gt;</b> or <b>-wordlist &lt;filename&gt;</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Uses a custom <i>wordlist</i> for brute-forcing subdomains instead of the default.<br>Example: <i>-file my_subdomains.txt</i><br><br><b><b>-delay &lt;seconds&gt;</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets a <i>delay</i> in seconds between DNS requests to avoid detection or rate limiting.<br><br><b><b>-threads &lt;number&gt;</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the <i>number</i> of concurrent threads for faster scanning.<br><br><b><b>-dns-servers &lt;server1,server2,...&gt;</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Provides a comma-separated list of <i>DNS servers</i> to use for lookups.<br><br><b><b>-search &lt;domain&gt;</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Appends the specified <i>domain</i> to the wordlist entries, searching for subdomains in that context.<br><br><b><b>-full-lookup</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Performs a comprehensive DNS lookup for all discovered hosts.<br><br><b><b>-connect</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Attempts to connect to discovered hosts on a list of common ports (e.g., 80, 443, 21, 22, 23, etc.) to verify liveness.<br><br><b><b>-nopattern</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Disables the anti-pattern matching feature, which is designed to reduce false positives in subdomain discovery.<br><br><b><b>-noexact</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Prevents performing exact record lookups, which might miss some entries but speed up the scan.<br><br><b><b>-nonameservers</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Skips querying Name Server (NS) records for discovered subdomains.<br><br><b><b>-nonrecurse</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Disables recursive lookups for newly found hosts, focusing only on direct DNS queries.<br><br><b><b>-noreverse</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Disables reverse IP lookups for identified IP addresses.<br><br><b><b>-print-only</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Outputs only the discovered <i>hostnames</i> to the console.<br><br><b><b>-print-ip-only</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Outputs only the discovered <i>IP addresses</i> to the console.<br><br><b><b>-print-file &lt;filename&gt;</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Saves all scan results (hostnames and IPs) to the specified <i>file</i>.<br><br><b><b>-silent</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Suppresses most informational output, showing only critical data.<br><br><b><b>-verbose</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enables more detailed output for debugging and comprehensive reporting.<br><br><b><b>-h</b> or <b>-help</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays the command's <i>help message</i> and available options.<br><br><b><b>-v</b> or <b>-version</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Shows the <i>version information</i> of the <i>fierce</i> tool.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>fierce</i> is a powerful and efficient <b>DNS enumeration tool</b> designed for penetration testers and security researchers. Its primary goal is to locate non-contiguous <b>IP space</b> and identify <b>hostnames</b> within target domains.<br>It achieves this by attempting <i>zone transfers</i>, brute-forcing common subdomains from a built-in wordlist, and scanning for IP addresses associated with discovered hostnames. The tool is effective at uncovering hidden infrastructure, helping to map out an organization's network presence, and identifying potential attack surface areas that might otherwise be overlooked.<br>It's a key component in the <b>reconnaissance phase</b> of ethical hacking, providing crucial intelligence for subsequent security assessments.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<i>fierce</i> relies heavily on <b>DNS server responsiveness</b> and might be slow or inaccurate if DNS servers are overloaded or misconfigured.<br><b>Brute-forcing</b> can be noisy and detectable by intrusion detection systems (IDS) or firewall rules, potentially leading to blocks.<br><b>Zone transfers</b> are often disabled on modern DNS servers for security reasons, limiting this aspect of the tool's effectiveness.<br>The effectiveness of brute-forcing depends heavily on the quality and comprehensiveness of the <i>wordlist</i> used.


title: <B>COMMON USAGE SCENARIOS</B>
content:
<b>Reconnaissance Phase</b>: Utilized by penetration testers to gather initial information about a target's online presence before launching more focused attacks.<br><b>Asset Discovery</b>: Helps organizations discover previously unknown or forgotten assets (subdomains, IP ranges) that might be vulnerable.<br><b>Attack Surface Mapping</b>: Creates a comprehensive map of an organization's publicly exposed network components.


title: <B>BRUTE-FORCING EXPLAINED</B>
content:
<i>fierce</i> employs a <b>brute-force dictionary attack</b> against a target domain, attempting to resolve common subdomain names (e.g., <i>www</i>, <i>mail</i>, <i>vpn</i>, <i>dev</i>) combined with the target domain. This method is effective even when zone transfers are disabled.<br>It also attempts to discover hostnames in adjacent IP ranges by looking for common patterns, often uncovering hosts that are not directly linked to the primary domain's DNS.


title: HISTORY
content:
<i>fierce</i> was originally developed by <b>RSnake (Robert Hansen)</b> and gained popularity in the early 2000s as a go-to tool for <b>DNS enumeration</b> in penetration testing. It was often part of ethical hacking toolkits, valued for its ability to uncover hidden network infrastructure. While its effectiveness for <i>zone transfers</i> has diminished due to improved DNS security, its <i>brute-forcing capabilities</i>, especially with custom wordlists, remain highly valuable in the reconnaissance phase of security assessments. It has seen ongoing community contributions and updates.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>doctl</b> [<i>global-flags</i>] &lt;<i>command</i>&gt; &lt;<i>subcommand</i>&gt; [<i>flags</i>] [<i>arguments</i>]


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>--access-token &lt;token&gt;</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify a DigitalOcean API access token. Overrides any token from the config file or environment variables.<br><br><b>--api-url &lt;url&gt;</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify the base URL for the DigitalOcean API. Rarely used in typical scenarios.<br><br><b>--config &lt;path&gt;</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Path to the <i>doctl</i> configuration file. Defaults to <i>~/.config/doctl/config.yaml</i>.<br><br><b>--context &lt;name&gt;</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Use a specific configuration context. Useful for managing multiple DigitalOcean accounts or tokens.<br><br><b>--output &lt;format&gt;</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Output format for data. Supported formats include <i>json</i>, <i>csv</i>, <i>text</i>, and <i>yaml</i>. Defaults to <i>text</i>.<br><br><b>--trace</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enable API call tracing, printing detailed request and response information to stderr.<br><br><b>--verbose</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enable verbose output, providing more detailed information about operations.<br><br><b>--no-headers</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Disable table headers when using <i>text</i> or <i>csv</i> output format.<br><br><b>--wait</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Wait for the requested action to complete before returning. Applies to actions like Droplet creation.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>doctl</i> is the official command-line interface (CLI) for managing DigitalOcean resources. It allows users to interact with the DigitalOcean API directly from their terminal, automating tasks and scripting operations on their cloud infrastructure. With <i>doctl</i>, you can provision and manage Droplets, Kubernetes clusters, databases, load balancers, domains, firewalls, and much more. It provides a powerful and efficient way for developers and system administrators to control their DigitalOcean account without needing to access the web control panel, supporting various output formats like JSON, CSV, and YAML for easy integration with other tools.


title: CAVEATS
content:
Authentication is crucial: <i>doctl</i> requires a valid DigitalOcean API token. Ensure your token has the necessary permissions for the operations you intend to perform. <br>API rate limits apply, so excessive or rapid calls might temporarily block access. <br>Always verify the region and resource IDs when performing destructive actions, as these operations are irreversible.


title: AUTHENTICATION
content:
Before using <i>doctl</i>, you must authenticate. The primary method is to initialize your configuration using <i><b>doctl auth init</b></i>, which will prompt you for a DigitalOcean API token. Tokens can be generated in the DigitalOcean control panel. Alternatively, you can specify a token directly via the <i>--access-token</i> flag or the <i>DO_TOKEN</i> environment variable.


title: COMMAND STRUCTURE
content:
<i>doctl</i> commands follow a hierarchical structure: <i><b>doctl &lt;resource-type&gt; &lt;action&gt;</b></i>. For example, <i><b>doctl compute droplet create</b></i> to create a Droplet, or <i><b>doctl kubernetes cluster list</b></i> to list Kubernetes clusters. Each command and subcommand typically has its own set of flags to refine the operation.


title: HISTORY
content:
<i>doctl</i> was developed by DigitalOcean to provide a native command-line experience for their users, complementing their web UI and API documentation. It has evolved significantly since its initial release, growing alongside the DigitalOcean platform to support new services and features. Its development reflects the broader industry trend of cloud providers offering robust CLI tools for automation and developer workflows.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>--help</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays help information for the <b>caprover</b> CLI or a specific command.<br><br><b>-h</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Short form for --help.<br><br><b>--version</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Shows the current version of the <b>caprover</b> CLI client.<br><br><b>-v</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Short form for --version.<br><br><b>--caproverUrl <url></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the URL of the CapRover instance to connect to, overriding the saved configuration.<br><br><b>--password <password></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Provides the CapRover server password directly. Use with extreme caution as it may expose credentials in shell history.<br><br><b>--debug</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enables verbose debug logging for troubleshooting purposes.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
CapRover is an open-source Platform-as-a-Service (PaaS) that simplifies web application deployment. The <b>caprover</b> command-line interface (CLI) is its primary tool, allowing developers and administrators to interact with a CapRover server directly from their local machine. It facilitates a wide array of tasks, including logging into CapRover instances, deploying new applications, managing existing apps (creation, deletion, configuration updates), setting up custom domains, and overseeing user access. The CLI significantly streamlines CI/CD workflows, enabling automated deployments and infrastructure management. It acts as a client communicating with the CapRover API, providing a convenient and powerful way to control your deployments without needing direct server access or complex manual configurations. It abstracts away much of the underlying Docker, Nginx, and Let's Encrypt complexities, offering a user-friendly interface for your self-hosted cloud.


title: CAVEATS
content:
The <b>caprover</b> CLI requires a running CapRover server instance to function. <br>Network connectivity to the target CapRover server is essential for all operations. <br>Be cautious when using the <code>--password</code> option as it can expose credentials in your shell history. <br>Some commands require administrator privileges on the CapRover server.


title: COMMON COMMANDS
content:
The <b>caprover</b> CLI operates through various subcommands to perform specific tasks:<br><b>caprover login</b>: Authenticates the CLI with a CapRover instance.<br><b>caprover deploy</b>: Deploys an application, either from the current directory (source code) or a specified Docker image/tarball.<br><b>caprover app create &lt;appName&gt;</b>: Creates a new application on the CapRover server.<br><b>caprover app delete &lt;appName&gt;</b>: Removes an existing application.<br><b>caprover app config &lt;appName&gt; --key &lt;key&gt; --value &lt;value&gt;</b>: Sets or updates environment variables or other configuration settings for an application.<br><b>caprover app list</b>: Displays a list of all applications deployed on the server.<br><b>caprover server update</b>: Initiates an update for the CapRover server software itself.<br>


title: CONFIGURATION FILES
content:
The <b>caprover</b> CLI stores its configuration and login tokens in <code>~/.caprover/config.json</code>. This file contains the server URL, authentication tokens, and potentially other settings. It should be protected as it contains sensitive information.


title: HISTORY
content:
CapRover was initiated as an open-source project by Mahmoud F. with the goal of providing a simple, self-hostable Platform-as-a-Service (PaaS) similar to Heroku, but on your own server. Developed to abstract the complexities of Docker, Nginx, and Let's Encrypt, it quickly gained traction for its ease of use in deploying web applications. The <b>caprover</b> CLI has been a core component from early on, evolving alongside the platform to offer comprehensive control over app deployment, management, and server configuration, continuously improving the developer experience.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><I>command</I></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The specific operation to perform. Common commands include <B>deploy</B>, <B>restart</B>, <B>logs</B>, <B>status</B>, and <B>ssh</B>.<br><br><b><B>deploy</B></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Deploys a specified project and environment. This command initiates the build and deployment process defined within your Coolify instance. Requires <B>--project</B> and <B>--environment</B> options.<br><br><b><B>restart</B></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Restarts all services associated with a given project and environment. Useful for applying configuration changes or resolving issues. Requires <B>--project</B> and <B>--environment</B> options.<br><br><b><B>logs</B></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Fetches and displays real-time logs for a project's services. Requires <B>--project</B> and <B>--environment</B> options. An additional <B>--follow</B> option can stream logs as they are generated.<br><br><b><B>status</B></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Shows the current status of services within a specified project and environment, indicating if they are running or stopped. Requires <B>--project</B> and <B>--environment</B> options.<br><br><b><B>ssh</B></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Establishes an SSH connection to a running container of the specified project and environment, enabling direct debugging or command execution. Requires <B>--project</B> and <B>--environment</B> options.<br><br><b><B>--project=&lt;id&gt;</B></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Mandatory option for most commands, specifying the unique identifier of the project to act upon. This ID is found in your Coolify web interface.<br><br><b><B>--environment=&lt;name&gt;</B></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Mandatory option for most commands, specifying the name of the environment (e.g., 'production', 'staging') within the project.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>Coolify</i> is an open-source, self-hosting platform designed to simplify the deployment and management of web applications, databases, and services on your own server. It offers an alternative to services like DigitalOcean App Platform or Heroku, giving users full control over their infrastructure.<br><br>The <B>coolify</B> command, typically invoked as <B>coolify-cli</B>, serves as the command-line interface for interacting with your Coolify instance. It allows developers and administrators to perform common tasks such as initiating deployments, restarting services, viewing logs, and accessing application containers via SSH, all from the terminal. This CLI tool complements the platform's comprehensive web interface, enabling automation and script-based management workflows for your self-hosted projects. It's particularly useful for integrating Coolify operations into CI/CD pipelines or for quick administrative actions without navigating the web UI.


title: CAVEATS
content:
The <B>coolify-cli</B> requires a running Coolify server instance to connect to and manage. It also necessitates proper authentication configured via API keys or session tokens. Project and environment IDs/names must accurately correspond to those configured on your Coolify server. Network connectivity to the Coolify server is essential for the CLI to function. The exact syntax and available commands may evolve with new versions of Coolify and its CLI.


title: INSTALLATION
content:
To install the <B>coolify-cli</B>, users typically follow the instructions provided on the official Coolify documentation or GitHub repository. This often involves downloading a pre-compiled binary for your specific operating system (Linux, macOS, Windows) or building the tool from source code. Once the executable is obtained, it needs to be placed in a directory included in your system's PATH for easy access.


title: AUTHENTICATION
content:
Before using <B>coolify-cli</B>, you must authenticate it with your Coolify server instance. This is commonly achieved by generating an API key from your Coolify web interface. The CLI tool then needs to be configured with this key and the URL of your Coolify server, often through environment variables (e.g., <B>COOLIFY_SERVER_URL</B>, <B>COOLIFY_API_KEY</B>) or a configuration file. This secure setup ensures that the CLI can interact with your projects and resources on the server.


title: HISTORY
content:
The <B>coolify-cli</B> tool was developed by Coollabs, the creators of the Coolify self-hosting platform. It emerged as an extension to the core platform, aiming to provide a more streamlined and automated way to interact with Coolify instances from the command line. Its development is ongoing, evolving with the platform to offer comprehensive management capabilities for self-hosted applications and services. It became a crucial component for headless operations and CI/CD integration.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-h, --help</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display a help message and exit.<br><br><b><b>-V, --verbose</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Increase the verbosity of the output, showing more details about the conversion process.<br><br><b><b>-q, --quiet</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Decrease the verbosity of the output, suppressing most messages.<br><br><b><b>-o &lt;file&gt;, --output-file &lt;file&gt;</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify the name of the output file. By default, <i>ttx</i> generates a file name based on the input.<br><br><b><b>-d &lt;dir&gt;, --output-dir &lt;dir&gt;</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify the directory where the output file(s) should be written.<br><br><b><b>-f, --force</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Force overwriting of an existing output file without prompting.<br><br><b><b>-z &lt;table&gt;, --sfnt-tables &lt;table&gt;</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Export only the specified SFNT tables. This option can be used multiple times to include several tables (e.g., <code>-z glyf -z head</code>).<br><br><b><b>-x &lt;table&gt;, --exclude-sfnt-tables &lt;table&gt;</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Exclude specified SFNT tables from export. This option can be used multiple times.<br><br><b><b>-i, --import</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Explicitly convert a TTX (XML) file back into a binary font file. This is the default action if the input file has a <code>.ttx</code> extension.<br><br><b><b>-e, --export</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Explicitly convert a binary font file into a TTX (XML) file. This is the default action if the input file is not <code>.ttx</code>.<br><br><b><b>-s, --split-tables</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Split individual font tables into separate TTX XML files, one for each table, rather than a single large XML file.<br><br><b><b>--flavor &lt;flavour&gt;</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;When importing, specify the output SFNT flavor, such as <code>WOFF</code> or <code>WOFF2</code>.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>ttx</i> is a command-line utility from the <b>FontTools</b> library, primarily used for converting font files between their binary formats (like TrueType, OpenType, WOFF) and an XML-based representation. This XML format, also known as TTX, makes it significantly easier for developers and font designers to inspect, modify, and manipulate font data using standard text editors and XML tools. It supports various font tables, including glyph outlines, kerning, hinting, and metadata.<br><br>The conversion process is fully reversible, allowing users to convert an XML file back into a binary font file. This capability is invaluable for debugging font issues, automating font modifications, and integrating font development into version control systems. <i>ttx</i> is a fundamental tool for anyone working deeply with font specifications and development, providing a powerful bridge between human-readable text and complex binary font data.


title: CAVEATS
content:
<i>ttx</i> relies on the <b>FontTools</b> Python library, meaning it must be installed (typically via pip) and is not a core utility found on all Linux systems by default.<br><br>Converting large font files can generate extremely large XML output files, potentially consuming significant disk space and memory during both export and import operations. Modifying the generated TTX XML requires a thorough understanding of OpenType and TrueType font specifications to ensure that the font remains valid and functional after re-import.


title: USAGE MODES
content:
<i>ttx</i> operates in two primary modes based on the input file type: if the input is a binary font file (e.g., <code>.ttf</code>, <code>.otf</code>), it defaults to <i>exporting</i> it to TTX (XML). If the input is a TTX (<code>.ttx</code>) XML file, it defaults to <i>importing</i> it back into a binary font. These modes can also be explicitly set using the <code>-e</code> and <code>-i</code> options.


title: XML STRUCTURE
content:
The generated TTX XML closely mirrors the internal structure of TrueType and OpenType fonts. Each major font table (e.g., <code>&lt;glyf&gt;</code>, <code>&lt;cmap&gt;</code>, <code>&lt;head&gt;</code>, <code>&lt;name&gt;</code>) is represented as a distinct XML element, containing detailed and human-readable information about the font's data, including glyph definitions, character mappings, and metadata.


title: HISTORY
content:
<i>ttx</i> is a fundamental component of the <b>FontTools</b> library, an open-source Python library for manipulating fonts. <b>FontTools</b> was originally developed by Just van Rossum in 1999 and has since grown into an essential toolkit for font developers, type designers, and anyone working with low-level font data. The <i>ttx</i> command specifically provides the crucial functionality of converting fonts to and from an XML representation, making them accessible for text-based editing, version control, and automated processing.<br><br>Its development has closely tracked the evolution of font technologies, including robust support for OpenType variations and WOFF formats, establishing <i>ttx</i> as a de-facto standard for font introspection and modification within the open-source typography community.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>gs</b> [<i>options</i>] [<i>input_files</i> | <i>PostScript_code</i>]<br><br><b>Common examples:</b><br>To convert a PostScript file to PDF:<br><code><b>gs -sDEVICE=pdfwrite -o </b><i>output.pdf</i><b> </b><i>input.ps</i></code><br><br>To convert a PDF file to a high-resolution PNG image:<br><code><b>gs -sDEVICE=png16m -r300 -o </b><i>output.png</i><b> </b><i>input.pdf</i></code><br><br>To display a PDF document:<br><code><b>gs </b><i>document.pdf</i></code>


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-sDEVICE=</b><i>&lt;device&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the output device (e.g., <i>pdfwrite</i>, <i>png16m</i>, <i>jpeg</i>, <i>pswrite</i>).<br><br><b><b>-o </b><i>&lt;file&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the output file name. Use <b>-</b> for standard output.<br><br><b><b>-r</b><i>&lt;res&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the X and Y resolution (e.g., <b>-r300</b> for 300 DPI). Can be <b>-r<i>Xres</i>x<i>Yres</i></b>.<br><br><b><b>-dBATCH</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Exits Ghostscript after processing all input files.<br><br><b><b>-dNOPAUSE</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Disables the prompt and pause between pages.<br><br><b><b>-dSAFER</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enables safer mode, restricting file system access and shell escapes (default in recent versions).<br><br><b><b>-dQUIET</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Suppresses informational messages and prompts.<br><br><b><b>-g</b><i>&lt;width&gt;</i><b>x</b><i>&lt;height&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the device width and height in pixels for raster devices.<br><br><b><b>-sPAPERSIZE=</b><i>&lt;size&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the paper size (e.g., <i>a4</i>, <i>letter</i>, <i>legal</i>).<br><br><b><b>-c '</b><i>&lt;PostScript_code&gt;</i><b>' -f</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Executes PostScript code directly from the command line, then processes files.<br><br><b><b>-I</b><i>&lt;directory&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Adds a directory to the search path for fonts and other files.<br><br><b><b>-dPDFFitPage</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Scales PDF pages to fit the output device's paper size.<br><br><b><b>-dCompatibilityLevel=</b><i>&lt;level&gt;</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the PDF compatibility level (e.g., <i>1.4</i>, <i>1.5</i>) for <i>pdfwrite</i> device.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<b>Ghostscript</b> is a versatile interpreter for the <b>PostScript language</b> and <b>PDF (Portable Document Format)</b>. It serves as a core technology for rendering these document formats for display on various devices, printing, or conversion into other formats.<br><br>Beyond simple viewing and printing, Ghostscript functions as a powerful imaging engine. It can convert PostScript and PDF files into a multitude of image formats like JPEG, PNG, TIFF, and more, at specified resolutions and color depths. It's often used programmatically by other applications such as PDF viewers, print spoolers (like CUPS), and document processing tools for tasks like rasterization, compression, and format conversion.<br><br>Developed by Artifex Software and available under both open-source (GNU AGPL) and commercial licenses, Ghostscript is an indispensable utility in Unix-like operating systems, providing robust and flexible document manipulation capabilities.


title: CAVEATS
content:
Running <b>Ghostscript</b> with untrusted PostScript or PDF files can pose security risks, as these formats can execute arbitrary code. While <b>-dSAFER</b> mode (often default) mitigates many risks, it's not foolproof. High-resolution rendering or complex documents can consume significant memory and CPU resources. Achieving desired output quality sometimes requires fine-tuning numerous options, which can have a steep learning curve.


title: OUTPUT DEVICES
content:
Ghostscript's power lies in its extensive range of output devices. These include various image formats (e.g., <i>pngalpha</i>, <i>jpeg</i>, <i>tiffg4</i>), vector formats (e.g., <i>pswrite</i>, <i>eps2write</i>), and the critical <i>pdfwrite</i> device for PDF generation and manipulation. The choice of device dictates the output file type and available options.


title: COMMON USE CASES
content:
Beyond simple viewing, <b>Ghostscript</b> is frequently used for:<br>Converting PostScript/PDF to raster images for web or display.<br>Creating smaller, optimized PDF files from larger ones.<br>Merging multiple PostScript/PDF files into a single document.<br>Extracting specific pages from a PDF.<br>Converting between PostScript and PDF formats.<br>Rendering documents for various printers, especially those that don't natively support PostScript or PDF.


title: HISTORY
content:
<b>Ghostscript</b> was first developed by L. Peter Deutsch and released in 1986 under the name <b>Ghostscript</b>. It quickly became the de facto standard for interpreting PostScript outside of Adobe's proprietary systems. Its open-source nature, initially under the GNU GPL, contributed to its widespread adoption in Unix-like operating systems and as a core component in many printing systems, including <b>CUPS (Common Unix Printing System)</b>. Over the years, its capabilities expanded significantly to include comprehensive PDF interpretation and a wide array of output devices, maintained by Artifex Software.


title: SEE ALSO
content:
<b>ps2pdf(1)</b>: PostScript to PDF converter (often a Ghostscript wrapper), <b>pdftops(1)</b>: PDF to PostScript converter (from Poppler utilities), <b>convert(1)</b>: ImageMagick utility for image conversion, often uses Ghostscript for PDF/PS, <b>lpr(1)</b>: Print files, <b>qpdf(1)</b>: Tool for structural, content-preserving transformations on PDF files, <b>pdfinfo(1)</b>: PDF document information extractor


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>mkstr</b> [<i>OPTIONS</i>] [<i>INPUT</i>...]<br><b>mkstr</b> [<i>OPTIONS</i>] <i>STRING</i><br>(<i>Hypothetical Syntax</i>)


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>--help, -h</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display help message and exit.<br><br><b>--version, -v</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display version information and exit.<br><br><b>--output=FILE, -o FILE</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Write output strings to <i>FILE</i> instead of standard output.<br><br><b>--format=TYPE, -F TYPE</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify the output string format (e.g., <i>c-string</i>, <i>json</i>, <i>raw</i>).<br><br><b>--escape=CHARS, -e CHARS</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Escape specific characters or apply standard escaping rules for the chosen format.<br><br><b>--input=FILE, -i FILE</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Read input from <i>FILE</i>. Multiple `-i` options can be used.<br><br><b>--literal, -l</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Treat input as a literal string, preventing special character interpretation.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The command `mkstr` is <b>not a standard Linux utility</b> found in most distributions. Its name, a contraction of 'make string,' suggests a hypothetical function related to generating, formatting, or managing string data. If such a command existed as a general-purpose tool, it would likely be used by developers or scripters to create string literals, string tables, or formatted text output from various inputs.<br><br>It might process input files, command-line arguments, or standard input to produce strings suitable for inclusion in source code (e.g., C/C++ string arrays), configuration files, or other text-based data structures. Common functionalities could include escaping special characters, converting character encodings, or wrapping strings with specific delimiters, making it a flexible tool for automating string content generation.


title: CAVEATS
content:
The command `mkstr` is <b>not a standard part of the GNU Core Utilities or any widely distributed Linux package</b>. If you encounter `mkstr`, it is likely a custom script, a utility specific to a particular project's build system, or part of a highly specialized toolchain (e.g., related to `gettext` or very old compiler suites). Users should verify its origin and specific functionality within their environment. Do not assume universal availability or behavior.


title: USE CASES (HYPOTHETICAL)
content:
If `mkstr` were a common utility, its primary use would be in <i>build scripts</i> and <i>development workflows</i> to automatically generate string constants or data. For instance, converting a list of error messages from a plain text file into a C header file containing an array of string literals, or transforming configuration options into a JSON string blob. This automates the often error-prone task of manually crafting formatted strings.


title: CONCEPTUAL ALTERNATIVES
content:
In the absence of a standard `mkstr`, developers typically rely on combinations of existing shell utilities like `echo`, `printf`, `sed`, `awk`, and `xargs`, often within shell scripts, to achieve similar string generation and formatting tasks. Programming languages like Python or Perl are also frequently used for more complex string processing.


title: HISTORY
content:
There is <b>no documented standard history for a general-purpose `mkstr` command</b> in Linux. The name `mkstr` has occasionally appeared in source code for various projects (e.g., some older GNU utilities or internal build tools) as a small, specialized program or script designed to handle string manipulation or generation for <i>that specific project's needs</i>. Its usage has never been standardized or widely adopted as a user-facing command.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>fpart</b> [<i>OPTIONS</i>] [<i>PATH...</i>]<br><b>fpart</b> [<i>OPTIONS</i>] [<i>PATH...</i>] -o <i>OUTPUT_DIR</i><br><b>fpart</b> [<i>OPTIONS</i>] [<i>PATH...</i>] -x <i>COMMAND</i> [<i>ARG...</i>]<br><b>fpart</b> [<i>OPTIONS</i>] [<i>PATH...</i>] -e <i>COMMAND</i>


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-a</b> <i>AGE</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Select files and directories older than <i>AGE</i>. <i>AGE</i> can be specified with units (e.g., '1d' for 1 day, '2h' for 2 hours).<br><br><b><b>-c</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Count only files and directories, do not list them. Prints the total number of files and directories found.<br><br><b><b>-e</b> <i>COMMAND</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Execute <i>COMMAND</i> for each generated extent. Each file list is passed to <i>COMMAND</i> via standard input. Implies <b>-x</b> if no <i>COMMAND</i> is specified after paths.<br><br><b><b>-f</b> <i>N</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Partition the input into <i>N</i> extents (file lists).<br><br><b><b>-i</b> <i>FILE</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Read input paths from <i>FILE</i> instead of scanning file system paths provided as arguments. One path per line.<br><br><b><b>-k</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Keep original order of files and directories within extents. May disable some optimizations.<br><br><b><b>-l</b> <i>LOGFILE</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Log activities to <i>LOGFILE</i>.<br><br><b><b>-n</b> <i>N</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Maximum number of files/directories per extent. If specified with <b>-s</b>, whichever limit is reached first will trigger a new extent.<br><br><b><b>-o</b> <i>OUTPUT_DIR</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Output each extent to a separate file within <i>OUTPUT_DIR</i>. Files will be named 'extent.0', 'extent.1', etc.<br><br><b><b>-p</b> <i>N</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Number of parallel jobs to run when using <b>-x</b> or <b>-e</b>. Defaults to 1. Using 0 implies as many jobs as CPU cores.<br><br><b><b>-s</b> <i>SIZE</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Maximum total size per extent. <i>SIZE</i> can be specified with units (e.g., '10G', '500M', '1T'). If specified with <b>-n</b>, whichever limit is reached first will trigger a new extent.<br><br><b><b>-t</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;List directories only (instead of files). Each extent will contain a list of directories.<br><br><b><b>-x</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Execute a <i>COMMAND</i> specified after all paths. The command's standard input will receive the file list. This is often used with <b>xargs</b>.<br><br><b><b>-z</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Compress output extent files using <b>zstd</b> if <b>-o</b> is used. Output files will have a '.zst' extension.<br><br><b><b>--help</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display a help message and exit.<br><br><b><b>--version</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Output version information and exit.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<b>fpart</b> is a powerful utility designed to rapidly scan large file systems and partition files and directories into manageable lists (referred to as "extents"). Unlike traditional tools like <b>find</b>, <b>fpart</b> is optimized for speed and scalability, especially when dealing with millions of files or terabytes of data. It can generate these lists based on criteria such as the number of files, total size, or even age.<br><br>The primary use case for <b>fpart</b> is to prepare data for parallel processing by other commands like <b>tar</b>, <b>rsync</b>, <b>cp</b>, or <b>mv</b>. It can either output the file lists to standard output (for piping to <b>xargs</b>) or directly execute commands for each generated extent. This makes it an invaluable tool for orchestrating large-scale backups, migrations, or data archival operations, significantly reducing processing time by leveraging multiple CPU cores and I/O channels.


title: CAVEATS
content:
When using <b>fpart</b> with external commands like <b>cp</b> or <b>mv</b>, ensure the destination paths are handled correctly by the target command to avoid unintended file placements or overwrites. Be mindful of I/O load: while <b>fpart</b> itself is fast, launching many parallel jobs (via <b>-p</b>) that perform heavy I/O can saturate disk bandwidth. Error handling for commands executed with <b>-e</b> or <b>-x</b> is the responsibility of the calling script or command.


title: EXIT STATUS
content:
<b>0</b>: Success.<br><b>1</b>: General error.<br><b>2</b>: Usage error (e.g., invalid options or arguments).


title: EXAMPLES
content:
<b>1. Archive a large directory into 10 parallel tar archives:</b><br><i>fpart -f 10 /mnt/data | xargs -P 10 -I % tar -czf backup-%.tar.gz --files-from=-</i><br><br><b>2. Create lists of files, each up to 10GB, into a directory:</b><br><i>fpart -s 10G /var/log /home -o /tmp/extent_lists</i><br><br><b>3. Synchronize files with rsync, processing 4 extents in parallel:</b><br><i>fpart -n 50000 -p 4 /source/data -e "rsync -avR --files-from=- . /destination/data"</i><br><br><b>4. Find all files older than 30 days and delete them (with confirmation):</b><br><i>fpart -a 30d /path/to/clean | xargs -p rm -v</i>


title: HISTORY
content:
<b>fpart</b> was developed by Google and later released as open-source software. It emerged from the need to efficiently manage and process extremely large file systems within Google's infrastructure, where traditional file traversal tools like <b>find</b> proved to be too slow and resource-intensive. Its design focuses on parallelism and robust handling of massive data sets, making it a valuable addition to the toolkit for system administrators and data engineers dealing with modern-day large-scale storage challenges.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>pnmtofstop</b> [<i>-alpha</i> | <i>-antialias</i> | <i>-invert</i> | <i>-width=N</i> | <i>-height=N</i>] [<i>pnmfile</i>]


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><i>-alpha</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Outputs PostScript code for an alpha channel bitmap instead of a monochrome bitmap.<br><br><b><i>-antialias</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Uses grayscale values to produce an antialiased PostScript bitmap, implying <i>-alpha</i>.<br><br><b><i>-invert</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Inverts the colors of the image; black becomes white and white becomes black.<br><br><b><i>-width=N</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Scales the output bitmap to be exactly <i>N</i> pixels wide. Aspect ratio may not be preserved unless <i>-height</i> is also used appropriately.<br><br><b><i>-height=N</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Scales the output bitmap to be exactly <i>N</i> pixels high. Aspect ratio may not be preserved unless <i>-width</i> is also used appropriately.<br><br><b><i>pnmfile</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The input PNM format image file (PBM, PGM, or PPM). If omitted, <i>pnmtofstop</i> reads from standard input.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<i>pnmtofstop</i> is a utility from the <b>Netpbm</b> image manipulation suite that transforms a Portable Anymap (PNM) image into a PostScript "stop" operator string. This output is specifically designed for defining font bitmaps within PostScript, particularly for <b>Adobe Type 1</b> fonts.<br><br>It interprets the pixels of the input PBM, PGM, or PPM image as a monochrome bitmap, where white pixels typically become transparent and black pixels become opaque. The primary use case is to embed raster images as character bitmaps directly into PostScript font definitions, allowing for custom character shapes or specialized symbols to be rendered by a PostScript interpreter.<br><br>The command reads a PNM file from its arguments or standard input and writes the generated PostScript `stop` operator string to standard output. This string is not a complete PostScript program but rather a fragment intended to be inserted into a larger font definition script, typically within a `buildchar` procedure. Options allow for handling alpha channels, antialiasing effects, inversion, and scaling of the output bitmap.


title: CAVEATS
content:
The output of <i>pnmtofstop</i> is a raw PostScript `stop` operator string, not a complete PostScript document. It is designed to be embedded within a larger PostScript font definition. Without <i>-alpha</i> or <i>-antialias</i>, color or grayscale input PNM images are converted to bilevel (black and white) internally using thresholding.


title: UNDERSTANDING THE "STOP" OPERATOR
content:
In PostScript, the `stop` operator is used within a `buildchar` (or similar character definition) procedure to define the bitmap data for a character. <i>pnmtofstop</i> generates the exact PostScript sequence that represents this bitmap, which then typically follows `buildchar` and precedes the final `end` or `return` statement in a font dictionary.


title: HISTORY
content:
<i>pnmtofstop</i> is a component of the <b>Netpbm</b> package, a venerable suite of graphics utilities that emerged from the original PBMplus toolkit in the late 1980s/early 1990s. Its development aligns with Netpbm's philosophy of providing small, focused command-line tools for image manipulation. This command specifically addresses the niche requirement of integrating raster images into PostScript font definitions, a task that was particularly relevant in early desktop publishing and custom font creation workflows requiring precise control over character bitmaps.


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-h</b>, <b>--help</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays a help message with available options and exits.<br><br><b><b>-d</b> <i>device</i>, <b>--device=</b><i>device</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the video input device to use (e.g., <i>/dev/video0</i>). Defaults to <i>/dev/video</i>.<br><br><b><b>-c</b> <i>channel</i>, <b>--channel=</b><i>channel</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Selects the input channel or source on the video device.<br><br><b><b>-s</b> <i>widthxheight</i>, <b>--size=</b><i>widthxheight</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the desired capture resolution (e.g., <i>640x480</i>, <i>1280x720</i>).<br><br><b><b>-f</b> <i>format</i>, <b>--format=</b><i>format</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the output image format (e.g., <i>jpeg</i>, <i>ppm</i>, <i>rgb24</i>) or video pixel format.<br><br><b><b>-o</b> <i>filename</i>, <b>--output=</b><i>filename</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Defines the name of the output file for captured images or video.<br><br><b><b>-t</b> <i>frames</i>, <b>--total-frames=</b><i>frames</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the total number of frames to capture for video recording. Use <i>0</i> for continuous capture.<br><br><b><b>-r</b> <i>rate</i>, <b>--rate=</b><i>rate</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies the desired frame rate in frames per second for video capture.<br><br><b><b>-j</b> <i>quality</i>, <b>--jpeg-quality=</b><i>quality</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Sets the JPEG compression quality for output images (1-100, where 100 is best).<br><br><b><b>-F</b>, <b>--fullscreen</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Attempts to capture in fullscreen mode if supported by the device and display server.<br><br><b><b>-i</b> <i>input</i>, <b>--input=</b><i>input</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Selects the video input source (e.g., <i>composite</i>, <i>tuner</i>, <i>camera</i>).<br><br><b><b>-S</b>, <b>--snap</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Captures a single snapshot image and exits. Overrides video capture settings.<br><br><b><b>-a</b>, <b>--avi-capture</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Enables AVI video capture mode. Requires <b>-t</b> to specify total frames.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
<b>streamer</b> is a robust command-line utility designed for capturing still images and video clips from <I>Video4Linux</I> (V4L) compatible devices, such as webcams, TV tuners, or video capture cards. It offers a flexible interface for interacting with these hardware devices, allowing users to precisely control parameters like capture resolution, frame rate, output format, and file naming conventions. This tool is particularly valuable for automating video capture tasks through scripting, or for users who prefer direct command-line control over graphical user interfaces.<br><br><b>streamer</b> supports a variety of common image formats, including JPEG and PPM, and can record video in formats like AVI. Its extensive set of options enables fine-grained customization of the capture process, making it a powerful utility for multimedia enthusiasts, developers, and system administrators working with V4L devices on Linux systems. It can handle single-frame snapshots, timed captures, and continuous video recording with ease.


title: CAVEATS
content:
Using <b>streamer</b> requires a properly configured <I>Video4Linux</I>-compatible device and its corresponding kernel modules to be loaded. Not all devices support every resolution, frame rate, or pixel format, so experimentation may be necessary to find compatible settings. The performance of capture can be highly dependent on the device's capabilities and available system resources. For advanced video processing, encoding, or streaming beyond basic capture, more comprehensive tools like <b>ffmpeg</b> might be more suitable.


title: VIDEO4LINUX (V4L) INTERACTION
content:
<b>streamer</b> operates directly on the <I>Video4Linux</I> API, the standard framework for video capture devices in the Linux kernel. A basic understanding of V4L concepts, such as video devices (e.g., <i>/dev/video0</i>), input channels, and supported formats, is beneficial for troubleshooting and optimizing <b>streamer</b> usage. This direct interaction makes it a core tool for low-level video device control.


title: SCRIPTING AND AUTOMATION
content:
Given its command-line interface, <b>streamer</b> is exceptionally well-suited for integration into shell scripts. This enables powerful automation capabilities, such as creating time-lapse videos by capturing images at set intervals, implementing simple security monitoring by periodically saving webcam snapshots, or building custom, automated video recording solutions without needing a graphical environment.


title: HISTORY
content:
<b>streamer</b> has been a foundational utility for Linux users interacting with <I>Video4Linux</I> devices for many years. It emerged to provide a simple, command-line driven method for webcam and other video input device control, predating the widespread adoption of more integrated multimedia frameworks. Its development has consistently focused on direct and reliable interaction with the underlying V4L API, making it a trusted choice for basic capture tasks and scripting. While the multimedia landscape on Linux has evolved with more feature-rich tools, <b>streamer</b> maintains its relevance as a lightweight and effective option, particularly for server environments, embedded systems, or situations where a minimal, scriptable capture solution is required.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>xfs_ils</b> [-eghlnrV] [-i <i>ino</i>] [-j <i>projid</i>] [-m <i>offset</i>] [-c <i>count</i>] [-N <i>namespace</i>] [-P <i>path</i>] <i>file|directory</i>


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b><b>-e</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Show extended attributes.<br><br><b><b>-g</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Show generation number.<br><br><b><b>-h</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Output sizes in human-readable format.<br><br><b><b>-i</b> <i>ino</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify a particular inode number to display.<br><br><b><b>-j</b> <i>projid</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify a particular project ID to display.<br><br><b><b>-l</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Use a long listing format.<br><br><b><b>-n</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Do not print filename (useful with <b>-i</b>).<br><br><b><b>-N</b> <i>namespace</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specify an extended attribute namespace.<br><br><b><b>-P</b> <i>path</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Display inode information for a path. Useful for indirect lookups.<br><br><b><b>-r</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Recursively list directory inodes.<br><br><b><b>-v</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Verbose output (currently not used by <b>xfs_ils</b>).<br><br><b><b>-V</b></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Print version number and exit.<br><br><b><b>-m</b> <i>offset</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Start dumping raw inode data at a specific offset.<br><br><b><b>-c</b> <i>count</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Dump a specific count of raw inode data bytes.<br><br><b><i>file|directory</i></b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;The target file or directory for which to list inode information.<br><br>


title: DESCRIPTION
content:
The command <B>ils</B> is <I>not a standard, universally available Linux command</I> found in typical base installations. Instead, it commonly refers to utilities designed to list <I>inode information</I> for specific advanced filesystems.<BR><BR>The most prominent example is <B>xfs_ils</B>, which is part of the <B>xfsprogs</B> package for the XFS filesystem. Another instance includes the <B>ils</B> command used in IBM Spectrum Scale (formerly GPFS).<BR><BR>Its primary purpose is to display the metadata associated with inodes, which are data structures that store information about files and directories, such as permissions, ownership, timestamps, and pointers to data blocks, but <I>not the file content itself</I>. This information is crucial for filesystem debugging, recovery, auditing, and understanding the low-level structure of how files are stored.<BR><BR>When encountering references to <B>ils</B>, it's essential to understand the context of the filesystem being discussed, as its availability and exact functionality depend on the specific filesystem tools installed on the system.


title: CAVEATS
content:
The command <B>ils</B> is <I>not a standard Linux utility</I> universally available. It is typically part of filesystem-specific toolkits (e.g., <B>xfsprogs</B> for XFS, or IBM Spectrum Scale tools). Accessing raw inode information often requires <I>root privileges</I>. Its output is highly technical and primarily intended for filesystem administrators or developers.


title: INODE STRUCTURE
content:
An <I>inode</I> is a fundamental data structure in Unix-like filesystems that describes a filesystem object, such as a file or directory. It stores vital metadata like permissions, owner, group, size, timestamps (access, modification, change), and the locations of the data blocks on disk. Critically, the inode <I>does not contain the file's name or its actual data content</I>; the filename is stored in the directory entry that points to the inode.


title: FILESYSTEM DEBUGGING
content:
<B>ils</B> (or <B>xfs_ils</B>) is an invaluable tool for filesystem debugging. It allows administrators to examine corrupted inodes, verify inode allocation, and trace file system structures at a very low level. This is crucial for troubleshooting disk errors, data recovery scenarios, or auditing changes to file metadata that might not be visible through standard `ls -l` commands.


title: HISTORY
content:
Inode listing utilities have been fundamental to advanced filesystems since their early development. <B>xfs_ils</B>, specifically, emerged as part of the <B>xfsprogs</B> suite, which was initially developed by Silicon Graphics (SGI) for its IRIX operating system's XFS filesystem in the 1990s. With XFS being ported to Linux, <B>xfs_ils</B> became an essential diagnostic tool for Linux users managing XFS volumes, maintaining its role as a key utility for inspecting low-level filesystem structures.


title: SYNOPSIS
content:
<b>remind</b> [<I>options</I>] [<I>file</I>...]<br><b>remind</b> [<I>options</I>] -c[<I>N</I>] [<I>YYYY-MM-DD</I>|<I>today</I>]<br><b>remind</b> [<I>options</I>] -g[<I>N</I>] [<I>YYYY-MM-DD</I>|<I>today</I>]<br><b>remind</b> [<I>options</I>] -s[<I>N</I>] [<I>YYYY-MM-DD</I>|<I>today</I>]<br><b>remind</b> [<I>options</I>] -p[<I>N</I>] [<I>YYYY-MM-DD</I>|<I>today</I>]<br><b>remind</b> [<I>options</I>] -w[<I>N</I>] [<I>YYYY-MM-DD</I>|<I>today</I>]


title: PARAMETERS
content:
<b>[-a]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Causes `<b>remind</b>` to perform an audible alarm, typically by printing `\a` to standard output. This is often used in conjunction with a terminal emulator's bell.<br><br><b>[-c<I>N</I>]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Generates a calendar for <I>N</I> months, starting with the current month. If <I>N</I> is omitted, it defaults to 1. An optional date (<I>YYYY-MM-DD</I> or <I>today</I>) can specify the starting month.<br><br><b>[-g<I>N</I>]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Generates a schedule for <I>N</I> days, starting from today. If <I>N</I> is omitted, it defaults to 1. An optional date (<I>YYYY-MM-DD</I> or <I>today</I>) can specify the starting day.<br><br><b>[-s<I>N</I>]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Generates a simple list of reminders for <I>N</I> days, starting from today. If <I>N</I> is omitted, it defaults to 1. An optional date (<I>YYYY-MM-DD</I> or <I>today</I>) can specify the starting day.<br><br><b>[-p<I>N</I>]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Generates a PostScript calendar for <I>N</I> months, which can then be printed. If <I>N</I> is omitted, it defaults to 1. An optional date (<I>YYYY-MM-DD</I> or <I>today</I>) can specify the starting month.<br><br><b>[-w<I>N</I>]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Generates a weekly calendar for <I>N</I> weeks, starting from the current week. If <I>N</I> is omitted, it defaults to 1. An optional date (<I>YYYY-MM-DD</I> or <I>today</I>) can specify the starting week.<br><br><b>[-f <I>file</I>]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Specifies an alternate reminder file to read instead of the default (`~/.reminders` or `/etc/reminders`). Multiple `-f` options can be used.<br><br><b>[-t <I>N</I>]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Scans for reminders within the next <I>N</I> days. This is the lookahead period for general reminder display. Defaults to 14 days if not specified.<br><br><b>[-q]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Operates quietly. Suppresses display of normal reminder messages. Useful when running `<b>remind</b>` from cron, where output might only be desired for `RUN` commands.<br><br><b>[-z]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Prevents `<b>remind</b>` from executing any programs specified by `RUN` commands within the reminder file. Only displays reminder messages.<br><br><b>[-e]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Ignores errors encountered while parsing the reminder file. This can be useful for debugging a complex file but should be used with caution.<br><br><b>[-D <I>variable</I>=<I>value</I>]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Defines a variable within `<b>remind</b>`'s internal language, overriding any definitions in the reminder file. Useful for dynamic configurations or testing.<br><br><b>[-h]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays a brief help message and exits.<br><br><b>[-v]</b><br>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Displays the version information for `<b>remind</b>` and exits.<br><br>


